Spirit ## § 9 9 Therefore we conclude this text is yet to be fulfilled afore the ultimate day of the generall Judgement when Christ layes downe his Government * Mr. Medas learned Notes upon this ninth Chapter of Isaiah collated with Mark 1.14 15. coming too late to my knowledge to be put into the Text I could not forbeare inserting it into the Margine which in summe is this Galilee was the third Province of those three into which Canaan or Phalestine was divided in Christs time and was on the North part remotest from Ierusalem and divided into two parts upper and lower the upper was mostly the Land of Nephthaly wherein was the goodly Metropolis of all Galilee Capernaum And this is the Galilee that was called Galilee of the Gentiles either because inhabited by the Gentiles long time viz to Solomons time or because Solomon gave twenty Cities thereof to Hiram or because it was the outmost of the Land next the Gentiles In the lower Galilee was the Tribe of Zebulon and Issachar wherein were the Cities of Nazareth and Bethsaida neare the Sea or Lake of Galilee or Cana of which and Christs first Miracle there Ioh. 2. and Mount Tabor From Capernaum along the Sea side through Bethsaida lay the great rode from Syria into Aegypt supposed to be that called in Scripture The way of the Sea In Christs time two of the said Provinces viz. Judea and Samaria were under the Roman President Pontius Pilate The third Galilee was under Herod or Auâ—ipas the Tetrarch because he had but the fourth part of his Fathers Kingdome who beheaded Iohn Baptist and closed with Pilat when Christ was condemned In this Province of Galilee was Christs conversation principally whiles he was on earth Matth. 3. ult Luke 1.26 Act. 1.11 Act. 2.7 Matth. 4.23 Matth. 9.35 Matth. 28.10 For the Messiah was to have his abode principally in Galilee according to the Prophesie in Esay 9.1 2 3 c. The Land of Galilee or of Zebulon and Nephthaly had the hard hap to be first in that calamity by the Assyrians 2 King 15.29 all which Cities there named except Ianoah and Gilead were Cities of Nephthaly and all Galilee and Nephthaly are there mentioned as all carried away Captive to Assyria In which calamity Isaiah comforts them with that Prophesie That they should have the first and principall share of the Messiahs presence when he should come Read the first seven verses of that ninth of Isa the meaning being that Christ should enlighten the Province of Galilee or the Land of Zebulon and Nephthaly with the glory of his presence And therefore if this be not a Prophesie of Christ I know not what is Compare Mat. 4. of his dwelling in Capernaum the Metropolis of Galilee The Jewes could not see this but would not beleeve because he was of Galilee Should say they Christ come out of Galilee should he not come out of Bethlehem So he should too and yet was by habitation and conversation a Galilean Christians also are to blame for darkning this Prophesie of Isa 9. and Matthewes application of it for my part I am perswaded that the foure or five first words of this ninth of Isaiah belong to the last verse of the former Chapter as Ierom and the Chalde referre them and that the words following begin a new Prophesie in this manner 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. ie According as the first time that he made vile or debased the Land of Zebulon and the Land of Nephthaly so in the latter time he shall make it glorious More of the reading of this text and Master Medes reasons the Reader may there see From all saith Mr. Mede I inferre that 1 Cor. 1.26 27. God takes the foolish things of the world to confound the wise c. For Galilee and her inhabitants in comparison of Iudea were reputed ignoble strangers being remote from Ierusalem and the Temple and part of the lot of the ten Tribes which Salmaneser captivated Howbeit some of the two Tribes after their returne especially in the prevailing times of the Maccabees setled there but at length were subdued by the Gentiles but still dwelling there and replenishing that Land with their owne people yet so as many of the Gentiles dwelt among them in so much that in these and the aforesaid respects they were despised of those that dwelt in Iudea Joh. 7.41.52 But Christ the King of Israel and Saviour of Mankind would as aforesaid be a Galilean The Doctrine he preacheth in Galilee is The time is fulfilled the Kingdome of God is at hand repent yee and beleeve the Gospel which Matth. 4. is called the Kingdome of Heaven which is all one with Kingdome of God See Dan. 6.24 The heavens beare rule that is God Luke 15.21 I have sinned against heaven and in thy sight Matth. 21.15 The Baptisme of John was it from heaven or from men Marke the Exegesis Luke 15. and the Antithesis Matth. 21. which shew God to be meant by Heaven The Kingdome of Heaven or of God is the Kingdome of Messiah or Christ Dan. 2 44. and Dan. 7.13 read the places From which places the Iewes call the Messiahs Kingdome the Kingdome of God or of Heaven because first it is in this place of Daniel said The God of heaven shall set up his Kingdome And in the other place That the Sonne of Man the Messiah should come in the clouds of heaven For our Saviour brought not this phrase with him but found it among the Iewes at his coming and approved it in oft use of it Matth. 13. The Kingdome of Christ is his Church or the Christian Church c. I must adde one thing more for the understanding of this Kingdome of Christ which I have hitherto described namely that it hath a two-fold state The one Militant in sufferings which is the present state begun at his first coming The second state is a triumphant state which shall be at his second in glory in the clouds of heaven at what time he shall put downe all authority power and rule and subdue all his enemies under his feet 1 Cor. 15. c. By which that Mr. Mede includes the Kingdome of Christ at his second coming to be partly intended in Isaiah 9 they may easily perceive that have heard and observed other passages afore quoted out of him SECT XIII § 1 THe third place in Isaiah is Chapter the eleventh in whole and throughout with a briefe collation of the tenth Chapter preceding and the twelfth following and therefore too large to write out In lieu thereof we shall expresse the severall passages from whence we deduce any argument § 2 To speake as shortly as we may to this place of Scripture In the tenth Chapter preceding the Lord threatens Judah that for their hypocrisie in Religion and their unrighteousnesse in their dealings he will send against them the Assyrian But then withall it is threatned that because the Assyrian would afflict the Jewes
absolutely for ever 2. If any hanker and long after the sence that our translation hints as if the three former Beasts had a kind of life allowed them after their dominion was taken away to give these content we can give them this faire answer which may likewise be handsomely improved as to the illustration of the ruine of the fourth Beast and so of the glorious remaining of the fift Monarchy That though the three former monarchies were dis-robed of their Monarchicall paramount Emperiality the former by the latter yet those three divine providence permitting had continued unto them some degree of regality untill some good space of time that the fourth had been in being and power which is the more probable 1. Because how else could it bee said that the third trampled the second and the fourth the third yea all the remainder of the former unlesse they had some entiry or being to be trampled 2. Because the whole Image is broken by the ruine on the feet of the fourth and last And therefore probably there were certaine broken limbs of the three former remaining to be beaten into dust with the fourth 3. Because wee have some such account given us in the faithfullest humane Histories First For the Armenians part of Chaldea as some learned affirme had a King and Kingly dignity even unto the dayes of the Roman Monarchy Tigranes King of Armenia was subdued by the Roman Pompey and his Country made tributary and so stamped under foot But after a while even in the reigne of Tiberius the same Armenia was fortified against the Romans whom the Emperour rather pacified with promises then subdued with Warre who after got the staffe so far into their hands againe that in the reigne of Jovinian they were called Friends not Vassals to the Romans Secondly For Persia they had great power in the time of Antiochus the great and of his sonne Antiochus the vile of the Greeke Monarchy downe unto and farre into the times of the Roman Emperours Of whom Julian lost his life Valerian went under ransome and Jovinian put to the shamefull foyle of the losse of foure whole provinces Thirdly For the Grecian Monarchy after the Romans had trampled Egypt Anthony and Cleopatra being subdued by Augustus and their Countries reduced to Provinces yet after the Greekes did so far shake off the Roman yoake as that they withstood divers of their stoutest Emperours viz. Galienus Aurelian and Dioclesian And this last answer doth also well illustrate the prophesie That whereas somthing of the former Monarchies remained in the days of the later yet the fift should leave nothing of the fourth and so nothing of the former All being to be broken in the feet of the fourth So glorious should the fift Kingdome be Now let the reader take which answer he pleaseth § 11 Having cleared we hope this knot let us now goe on with Daniels visions wherein he having already shewed us towards the discovery of the Who and what that destroyed the fourth Beast the posture and Acts of the Session of Judicature next he represents to us the person or persons the Captaine and his Army that tooke from the fourth Beast the Roman Monarchy and all other Kingdoms into their owne hands of power and these are Christ and his Christians vers 13 14. Daniel saw in the night-visions fitly signifying the Antichristian darknesse that then clouded the Church one like the Son of Man come with the cloudes of Heaven This is Christ who relatively as a King and Captaine Generall as the Scriptures set him forth and Mystically as he is by union of the Spirit head of his Church doth infer as soon as he is come an Host of Christians at his heeles as part of his Session when hee sits all which must necessarily bee here understood as the 18 26 and 27 verses being of the interpretation of the vision give sufficient warrant vers 18. But the SAINTS OF THE MOST HIGH shall take the Kingdome for ever Zech. 1.8 Heb. 2.10 Revel 19.11 12 13 14. even for ever and ever ver 27 28. But the Judgement shall sit and they of the Judgement viz. as it is in this vision the Son of Man and his ten thousand times ten thousand of all Nations Languages and Peoples that beleeve in him shall take away his the fourth Beasts dominion to consume and destroy it to the end And the Kingdome and Dominion and the greatnesse of the Kingdome under the whole Heaven shall bee given to the PEOPLE OF THE SAINTS OF THE MOST HIGH whose Kingdome is an everlasting Kingdome and all Dominions shall serve HIM Where most evidently Christ called here the Son of Man doth as a publicke person and a representative as the second Adam of all mankind that beleeve include and signifie all the sonnes of men that beleeve and they and he are so one mystically by faith and relatively as a corporation or united Emperiality that it is indifferent to the Holy Ghost to mention HIM or THEM to be the Ruler of this fifth Monarchy As for that his coming we mentioned but now Daniel expresseth it in the said thirteenth verse The Sonne of man came with the Clouds of Heaven Upon which words Mr. Parker saith thus The Sonne of man is Christ the Head including also his Body the Church as appeareth ver 26 27. He is said to come and this is his second coming in a large sence comprehending his coming to beare rule on earth by setting up his Kingdome breaking down the enemy and this is the space of forty five yeares and then his visible appearing at the Resurrection immediatly ensuing to finish the New Jerusalem begun in heavenly perfection And in this large description his second coming is usually taken in the Prophets He is said to come in the Clouds of Heaven that is on high above the glory and power of the Kingdomes of the earth in the supereminent Majesty of his Kingdom Rev. 11 12. Isa 52.13 Mat. 24.30 Thus Mr. Parker I only adde this that by the current and tenour of Scripture this phrase of his coming in the Clouds signifies withall that he shall visibly and really appeare in the natural Clouds at that his second coming but now mentioned as Christ himselfe and Saint John expounds the Prophets Matth. 24.30 Revel 1.7 Then shall appeare saith Christ in that twenty fourth of Matthew ver 30. the signe of the Sonne of Man in Heaven and then shall all the Tribes of the earth mourne and they shall SEE the Sonne of Man coming in the CLOVDES of Heaven c. And saith John in that Revel 1.7 Behold he cometh WITH CLOVDES and every eye shall SEE him and they also that pierced him § 13 He is said in the same thirteenth verse both to come to the Ancient of dayes that is as he is Mediator to the end to obtaine the Kingdome for his Saints being removed from the enemy So the Lamb is said to approach to him that
which the Apostle Heb. 2. v. 5 6 7. c. expounds of Christ and of the inhabited world to come as the Greek is vers 5. and saith that when Christ was ascended yet then all things were not put under his feet For all must be so all saith the Apostle there v. 8. that nothing must be excepted except as 1 Cor. 15. God himselfe But of this of Heb. 2. abundantly after § 2 Secondly we answer That it is the Kingdome of God his Father because Christ reignes over it as in unspeakable union with the God-head That though he be but one person yet he hath two natures So that the sense is the Kingdome of my Father that is the Kingdom of God as it is in the Syriac 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is it iâ— the Kingdome of a God-Christ or a God-man Christ For Father is ascribed in Scripture to the God-head usually in relation to Christ incarnate So that because the two natures are joyned as Collegues in one person over this Empire therefore it is called the Kingdome of CHRIST and of GOD. And such a phrase and upon such an occasion as cleerly relates to the Kingdome whereof we speak doth the Apostle use Eph. 5.5 The words are these This know that no whoremonger nor unclean person nor covetous man c. hath any INHERITANCE in the Kingdome of CHRIST and of GOD. The Heathens never imagined that vicious persons should enter into their heavenly Elysian-fields or the blissfull immortality of soules And Inheritance more suits to Earth then Heaven And lastly after the ultimate day of judgement Christ hath no Kingdome 1 Cor. 15.28 Therefore this place of Ephes 5.5 relates to the Great Restitution as plainlier appears by paralelling another place which fully answers to that of Ephes 5.5 viz. Rev. 22.11.15 The words are these He that is filthy let him be filthy still WITHOUT are 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. the dogs the whoremongers c. when is this viz. in the time when the Throne of GOD and of the LAMB shall be and appeare glorious in the Holy City the New Jerusalem verf. 1 2 3. twice expressed There is also the like phrase of calling it the Kingdome of God and of Christ in effect Rev. 12.9.10 And the great Dragon was cast out that old Serpent called the Devill and Satan c. And I heard a loud voyce saying in Heaven Now is salvation and strength and the KINGDOME OF OUR GOD and the POWER OF HIS CHRIST So that Christ as MAN joyntly with GOD doth reigne in this Millenary Kingdome And therefore Christ speakes of new Wine New in the Kingdome of his Father before the ultimate â—ay of judgement For after that day Christ hath no KINGDOME nor POWER but layes downe all as wee have oft â—epeated it out of 1 Cor. 15.28 God the Father is then to be all in all And therefore that expression so frequent in Rev. 20. The Saints hall reigne with Christ a thousand yeers cannot be meant of supernall eternall glory after the last judgement because that place but now quoted of 1 Cor. 15.28 affirmes that then Christ himselfe is said NOT TO REIGNE but to lay down all and to be subject unto him that put all things under him that God may be all in all so that then Christ only injoys glory with his Saints not reigne as Christ in glory SECT VI. Of the sixth Scripture for Christs Personall appearance at the great restauration of the Church 2 Tim. 4.1 I charge thee before God and the Lord Jesus Christ who shall judge the quicke and the dead at his appearing and his Kingdome § 1 THe Kingdome of Christ here mentioned cannot be referred to his past Government of the Church for it is expresse in the future tense now so long since his Ascention that he shall judge the quick and dead at his appearance and his Kingdom § 2 Nor can this Kingdome of Christ here spoken of signifie any Kingdome of Christ after the ultimate judgement for then Christ hath no Kingdome as but now and oft before was touched from 1 Cor. 15.28 § 3 But when Christ appeares next to judge the quicke and dead Saints to reward them and to destroy the then living incurable and incorrigible wicked by a particular day of Judgement at the beginning of the thousand yeares which is the Preface to the ultimate Judgement Christ all that while being busied in executing that first Sentence of Judicature Matth. 25. Come ye blessed of my Father inherite a kingdome provided for you according to Revel 11.15 17 18. of which much after compare Revel 19. three last verses I say when Christ shall then appeare hee shall have a Kingdome § 4 The word appearance is the same in the Greeke as that 2 Thes 2.8 so that Christ must appeare to the inhabitants of the earth where this his Kingdome is For the present as it is said Luk. 19.11 12. by Christ himselfe Christ is gone into a farre Country viz. into Heaven to take to him a Kingdom that is in the Metropolis Heaven he is to be crowned King of this his Kingdome he is to have on earth but he is to returne and then to take account of his servants in this his Kingdome and to dignifie the well-doers Christ must be the fifth Monarch Dan. 2.45 Dan. 7.13 14. I say Christ is to be the fifth Monarch The Jewes now have no King but in the last dayes they shall have David that is Christ the Sonne of David to be their King Hos 3. ver 4 5. And Christ in Acts 1. ver 3. having for forty dayes spoken of the things pertaining to the Kingdome of God and thereupon being asked by the Disciples ver 6 of his restoring the Kingdome to Israel he doth not deny the thing but only refuseth then to tell them the Time when it should be done But after he tells us by John in the Revelation as we shall see abundantly after SECT VII Of the seventh Scripture for the Personall appearance of Christ at the great restauration of the Church Acts 3.19 20 21. Repent yee therefore and be converted that your sins may be blotted out when the times of refreshing shall come from the presence of the Lord. And he shall send Jesus Christ which was before preached unto you whom the Heaven must receive untill the times of restitution of all things which God hath spoken by the mouth of all his holy Prophets since the world began § 1 THis place of Scripture is the more considerable in that it is urged by some that looke upon things only with a cursory eye against Christs glorious Kingdome yet to come on earth which if well weighed speakes most strongly for it § 2 For 1. Time and especially times twice mentioned in the Plurall cannot so well relate to a state after the last Judgement when time shal be no more Rev. 10.6 7. And the Angels sware by him that liveth for ever that there should be
by ascention to possesse the Kingdome of glory there to be installed into this on earth That being the originall of this or that being the Emperiality to which this the Tributary or Province Or Heaven being the Metropolis this below the Territories Sure enough expresse it is that he went away into a far Country which can be no other but heaven Christ having never travelled bodily out of his owne Country Secondly that though hee were before his going a Noble-man and had the Regiment or Government over a Royalty he had servants he had the command of imploying them as he listed And had the power of rewarding or punishing as he pleased so that the unprofitable servant that improved not his Talent he cast into utter darknesse where was weeping and gnashing of teeth Matth. 25.30 All which in that Matth. 25.14 c. is called the Kingdome of Heaven that is the Kingdome of Grace as appears in the former Parable of the Virgins the same in sence v. 1. c. Yet thirdly it is said this Noble-man went into a far Country to receive for himselfe another Kingdome and to returne vers 12. where as his receiving the Kingdome is put before his returning So on the other side it is said He returned receiving a Kingdome vers 15. * Gr. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which Arias renders in redire ipsum accipientem regâ—um where his returning is put before his receiving the Kingdome so that both Kingdomes must be here meant viz. Christ receiving the Kingdome of glory afore his returne and his Kingdome of visible power of reigning on earth after his returne For meerly his Kingdome of glory in Heaven cannot be here understood because touching his reigning there it was in vaine unpossible and altogether unlikely for his enemies to send an ambassage after him saying They would not have him to reigne over them And meerly his Kingdome of grace cannot bee here understood because that is otherwise expressed under the comparison of Talents compare Matth 25. And moreover it is here distinctly set downe that he is to goe into a far Country and then actually to receive another Kingdome partly before he returned and partly after he returned even as there is a diversity of actions In that Kingdome of Grace there is mentioned onely the neglect of improving the Talents but in this Kingdome of visible power received after his returne there is an high affront offered they send a message that they would not have him to reigne Again there is diversity of names The former are called Servants The latter are called Enemies Adde that there is a different dispensation of justice The unprofitable servant is put into a darke prison but the enemies must bee slaine AFORE HIM Therefore of necessity here must be hinted the Kingdome of Christs visible power That was it the Jewes expected yea and the best of them viz. the Disciples as we have heard afore and therefore to that Christ here speaks And for that Christ did not set up this at his coming in the flesh delivering them from the Romans therefore his Citizens his enemies hated him and sent a message after him They hated him as in relation of having him to be their visible King or King of visible Dominion when they cryed at his arraignment They had no King but Caesar And they sent an embassage after him when after his death in opposition to that kingly-hood they were angry with Pilate for writing in the Title set over him in Hebrew Greek and Latine THIS IS THE KING OF THE JEWES § 5 There are also severall other passages in this Parable for Christs visible appearance and setting up his visible Kingdome of power on earth yet before the ultimate day of judgement As first His giving to the improvers of their Talents to one the rule over ten Cities to another the rule over five Cities And the Talent of him that had improved nothing to him that had improved much all which compared with the preface of the Parable touching the appearing of the Kingdome cannot in any thing well relate to the state of meer supernall eternall glory in the highest Heavens 2 His causing his enemies to bee slaine afore his face suits not to Christs meer Kingdome of grace whose Dominion precisely considered is in the power of the Gospel Nor doth it comport and comply with the ultimate day of judgement when instead of slaying enemies there is a making them alive And instead of punishing them before Christs face there is a sending them away from the presence of the Lord into eternal judgement But these extremely well agree with Christs appearing to set up his visible Kingdome of power For then Christ shall destroy his Antichristian Jewish and Gentilish and mixt Turkish enemies with the brightnesse of his appearance as hath been opened upon 2 Thess 2. in Sect 4. of this second Book And shall slay them corporally Revelat. 19. latter end § 6 Indeed the whole Parable appears to them that can leave the commonr ode of Tradition and wishly minde and ingeniously weigh the passages and preface thereof to aime at Christs next coming to set up such a Kingdome as shall not onely perfect the spirituall deliverance of the Gentiles but also to performe the temporall deliverance of the Jewes from their dispersion and corporall miseries For the naturall current of the Parable runnes thus Christ being neer Hierusalem the Jewes thought the Kingdome of God would immediately appeare Doubtlesse it was far from their thoughts in the captive condition they were now in to expect the appearance of the Kingdome of glory in Heaven For the hundreds of promises of their deliverance from the corporall captivity were not fulfilled And for the Kingdome of grace these men little minded And the better sort viz. the Disciples and Beleevers had seen it appeare already therefore it is the other Kingdome of Christ viz. that of his visible power and rule to deliver them from their corporall enemies that they supposed would immediately appeare Now to this saith Christ It will not immediatly appeare but I must saith he first goe into a farre Country viz. into Heaven and there be instated and Crowned King and after that come againe and actually and visibly reigne the meane while you to whom I have given Talents that is have endowed with gifts must imploy them and at my return as a signe of my visible actuall power I will take account of you and cause mine enemies that oppose my visible reigning to bee slaine afore me § 7 Now at the ultimate day of Judgement Christ receives no Kingdome but resignes all his Kingdome Power and Dominion 1. Cor. 15.28 CHAP. III. Of five places out of the Old Testament to prove the visible appearance of Christ to the Church on earth at the time of her restauration SECT I. The first place is out of Dan. 7.11 to end of the Chapter § 1 THis place we put first because it doth give much light
seats were put And so the last and best Low-Dutch Stoclen gesetteâ— werden So that by all it appears that this was a vision of material Thrones and of them set up set or setled for Divine power to sit upon which is exceedingly confirmâ—d by verse 10. and 26. where wee have the sitting of the Judgement or Judicature and the Ancient of dayes did sit and I saw and behold one like the Son of man came with the clouds of Heaven and came to the Ancient of dayes and they brought him neer before him And there was given him dominion and glory and a KINGDOM c. And the Kingdome and dominion and the greatnesse of the Kingdome under the whole Heaven was given to the Saints of the most High c. Let us for the advantage of the generall worke in hand and the particular point now under consideration weigh these two places together in the semblance of both Visions in the circumstances of both and in the samenesse of intents in both ¶ 1 In the semblance or likenesse of both Visions in sundry particulars 1 Semblance I beheld till the Thrones were set And why Thrones in the plurall And for whom These many Thrones were set in the Vision ONE for the Ancient of dayes whose Throne was like a siery flame v. 9. ANOTHER for the SONNE OF MAN who came to the Ancient of dayes and they brought him neer before him and there was given him dominion and glory and a Kingdome and all people Nations and Languages to serve him v. 13 14. THE REST for the TEN THOUSAND TIMES TEN THOUSANDS THAT STOOD BEFORE HIM verse 10. viz. The PEOPLE OF THE SAINTS to whom the Kingdome and dominion c. under the whole heaven was given under Christ the aforesaid Son of Man vers 27. So Rev. 20.4 I saw Thrones The Second semblance is that in Dan. 7. v. 10. where it followes The Judgement or Judicature was set which confirmes that our reading of the former verse That is the Judges sate as in the great Sanedrim as after in vers 26. and 27. The judgement sitting the Kingdome and dominion and the greatnesse of the Kingdome under the whole heaven is given to the people of the Saints of the most high In like manner in Rev. 20.4 it is said by John I saw saith he those that sate on the Thrones viz. those that had been beheaded for the witnesse of Jesus and those which had not worshipped the beast c. nor received his marke c. Third semblance is in Dan. 7.22 Iudgement was given to the Saints of the most High and the time came that the Saints possessed the Kingdome In like manner Rev. 20.4 it is said Judgement was given to them viz. to the Saints aforesaid that having opposed Antichrist sate upon the Thrones As Paul saith 1 Cor. 6.2 The Saints shall judge the world Fourth semblance in Dan. 7.22 it is said The Saints possessed the Kingdome viz. under Christ to whom it is first in order given vers 14. which cannot be at the ultimate day of judgement when hee resignes all and therefore the Saints then have no Kingdome subject to them Just so it is said Rev. 20.4 The Saints lived and reigned with Christ a thousand yeers which must be before the ultimate day of Judgement at which time Iohn saith Time shall be no more and Paul saith 1 Cor. 15. there is no more reigning by any but by God alone that then must be all in all Thus of the Semblance ¶ 2 The next thing is the Circumstances viz. 1 The signall or note when this shall be namely when the Sonne of man shall come in or with the clouds Dan. 7.13 In like manner the signall or note is in the Rev. Chap. 1.7 where it is said as the general proposition to the whole Prophesie Christ shall be seen in the clouds at his coming to set up this Kingdome which is explained according to our sense Rev. 20. v. 1. That Christ comes down from heaven when he restraines Satan and gives this honour to the Saints of reigning with him 2 The time it self The time is saith Dan. 7.25 after a time and times and halfe a time of the powerful prevayling of Antichrist whether ye understand one limb viz. the Iewish Eastern the Turk called vers 24. that same ANOTHER that ariseth and subdueth three of the ten Kings or both viz. the Western the Christians Antichrist also viz. the Pope expressed in the ten hornes or Kings of his Kingdome v. 24. it makes no matter if we minde our large discourse afore of the identity of both And sutably in the Revelation 11. it is said that after the witnesses have Prophesied in sackcloath one thousand two hundred and sixty dayes because the Woman the Church was persecuted by Antichrist Rev. 12.6 for the space of one thousand two hundred and sixty dayes which in vers 24. is called A time and times and halfe a time because Antichrist had power so long to prevaile viz. two and forty months Rev. 13.5 which is all one with the one thousand two hundred and sixty dayes or time and times and halfe a time as here meant in the Revelation I say after this time and times and halfe a time it is here said in that Rev. 11.15 That the KINGDOMES of this WORLD were become the Kingdomes of the Lord and of his Christ and of the Saints sharing in this Reigning vers 18. The third circumstance is the order of things in this time viz. That in Dan. 7. v. 3. c. to v. 9. There must be foure Beasts come up from the Sea 1 A Lyon 2 A Bear 3 A Leopard 4 A terrible one with iron teeth and ten hornes and out of the ten one little horne that brake off three of the ten The foure Beasts saith Dan. v. 17. are the foure Kings or Kingly-hoods Royalties Emperialties or Monarchies of the world vers 23. as by severall characters they are described in that Chapter The ten hornes of the fourth Beast are saith Dan. v. 24. ten Kings that is ten Kingdomes under him All these foure Beasts fall as the maine of the first by the second and of the second by the third so the maine of the third and the remainder of all the three former by the fourth Dan. 7.19.23 The meaning is that as the first the Assyrio-Chaldean Monarchy whereof Nebuchadnezzar was the Golden-head in Daniels time Dan. 2. was broken by the second the silver Medo-Persian so this second by the third the brazen Grecian and this Grecian and the remainders of all the other were utterly subdued by the fourth the iron Roman Monarchy From this Roman at the time when it was something weakned by a dividing of it selfe now the third time which was about An. Chr. 799. into the Easterne and Westerne Empire Constantinople being the Royall Seat of Metropolis of that and Rome of this the little horne that sprang out of the ten and became diverse from the rest
Christ but anon Arianisme arose then Papisme mounted up then the Beast did arise The Church is put into a Wildernesse-condition the witnesses prophesie in sackcloth one thousand two hundred and sixty yeares which are not yet expired for they have not yet laine dead in the Grave three dayes and an halfe 5 ¶ Nor is that in the 18 19 20. verses yet fulfilled That all Idols are abolished that God hath so shaken the earth that he hath made the inhabitants thereof to cast away all their Idols and to hide themselves for feare The Territories of the Papacie extending over France Spaine Italy part of the Low Countries part of upper Germany part of Polonia part of the Indies c. are full of Idols and doe openly worship them as they say in the sight of the Sunne The great shake of these is not till the Witnesses have laine dead in the Grave three dayes and an halfe Revel 11. and then is the great fall ibid. ver 11. and when those things are shaken downe then the things that cannot be shaken viz. pure worship purely Spirituall and pure Saints shall remaine unmoved Heb. 12.27 § 6 Nor can it be rationally imagined that these things shall not be done till the ultimate day of the generall Judgement for then there is no time of establishing of the mountaine of the Lords house upon the top of the mountaine no proceeding of the word out of Zion no running and hiding from the presence of the Lord for the Sea and Grave c. shall give up their dead And all good shall be turned into an eternity of absolute glory Therefore the time of fulfilling of the Prophesies and Promises of this second of Isaiah is yet to come afore the ultimate day of the last generall Judgement * The Diatribae pars 4. of Mr. Mede lately coming forth and come to my hands since I penned this eleventh Section I thought it convenient to insert into the Margine at least his judgement of this second of Isaiah ver 2 3 4. which I will give you in his owne words HILS or MOUNTAINES saith he are States Kingdomes or Societies of men which consisting of degrees rising unto an height one above another are compared unto Mountaines raised above the ordinary plaine and levell of the earth The MOUNTAINE OF THE LORDS HOUSE is that State and Society of men which is called the Church and People of God REGNUM CAELORUM the Kingdome of Heaven i. e. a Kingdome whose both King and Kings Throne have their place and residence in the Heavens These words therefore are a Prophesie or Propheticall promise of the GLORIOUS EXALTATION WONDERFULL ENLARGMENT and UNHEARD-OF-PROSPERITY of this Society of men called the CHURCH above all States and Societies of men whatsoever The glory and EXALTATION is expressed in the word THE MOUNTAINE OF THE LORDS HOUSE SHAL BE ONE DAY EXALTED yee mounted not only above the lesser hill but above the highest mountaine though at this time it were depressed and trampled under foot by the proud enemies thereof The ENLARGMENT is in the word ALL NATIONS SHALL FLOW INTO IT i. e. though at the time of this Prophesie it were reduced to a small remnant yet the time was to come when it should not only consist of one Nation of the Jewes as then it did but of all Nations under the whole Heaven The PROSPERITY thereof begins to be described from these words ver 4. THEY SHAL BEAT THEIR SWORDS INTO PLOW-SHARES c. i. e though the greatest part of JACOB were already captive and Judah and Jerusalem in a continuall feare and no lesse danger of the Armies and invasion of the King of Babel yet the time should one day come that the People or Church of God should not only be the most exalted state upon the earth and the most ample and universall Dominion that ever was in the world but the most peaceable quiet and flourishing State that ever was since man was FIRST CREATED This is the Prophesie But now comes the Question Whether this as we have described it be and hath already been fulfilled or whether if already any wayes fulfilled whether it be not in part only performed and the full accomplishment reserved for time to come c. For here the Church is to be established on the tops of Mountaines c. so that no other State shal over-top or over-looke it much lesse trample it under feet Now whether there was ever such a time when this was compleatly fulfilled c. I leave it to any mans indifferent judgement who can compare the description of the Prophet with the stories of fore past and present times In the times immediatly after Christs PASSION I think any man will grant the Church then was neither VISIBLE nor GLORIOUS In the time of the PERSECUTING EMPEROURS when the Church had taken foot among the Gentiles and the Nations began to flow unto it it was a Society indeed VISIBLE but not GLORIOUS I am sure it was not in the TOPS of the MOUNTAINES but the Imperial Mountaine of ROME not only over-topped it but over trampled it under their feet In the time of CONSTANTINE and thereabouts after three hundred yeares cruell persecution the Sunne seemed as it were to breake forth of a Cloud but presently that glory was eclipsed and even the visibility of the Church in a manner covered with the thick and a Universally overspreading cloud of ARYANISME This ARIAN cloud was no sooner blown over but another great cloud of that fore-prophesied APOSTASIE of the Church begun to arise whereby the Churches glory was not onely eclipsed but at length againe the visibility thereof wholly overshaddowed with the thick darknesse of Idolatrous ANTICHRISTIANISME untill after a long day of darknesse it pleased God of late somewhat to dispel the cloud c. and we hope when the cloud shall be wholly consumed by the beams of the Sun of the Gospel the Church shall become not more visible then yet it is but far more glorious then ever hitherto it hath been WHEN THE FULNESSE OF THE GENTILES as St. Paul speaks SHALL COME IN. For we shall finde in the Prophesies of the Scriptures that there are two sorts and times of the CALLING OF THE GENTILES First that which should be in the REJECTION OF THE IEWS as St. Paul saith to PROVOKE THEM TO IEALOUSIE Such a calling as should be in a manner occasionall that God might not want a Church the time the Iewes were to be cast out So Rom. 11.15 The CASTING AWAY OF THE IEWS is the RECONCILING OF THE WORLD i.e. The CALLING OF THE GENTILES Whence we may see that the Apostles were not to preach Christ to the Gentiles untill being first offered to the Iewes they refused him And this is that calling of the Gentiles which hitherto hath been many yeares But there is a second and more glorious calling of the Gentiles to be found in the Prophesies of Scripture not a calling as this is
〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. as it is the Hebrew of purpose to multiply his Princedome and for peace without end The Jewes observe that the close-shut 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 mem in the middle of a word as here in 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 properly is a finall letter signifies the stability of the thing spoken of as open 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 in the end of a word as in 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Nehem. 2.13 which 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 properly is a middle letter signifies the brokennesse of the walls there spoken of which observation I mention not as a foundation strong enough for me to build upon but as a sufficient Narrative to declare the opinion of the Ancient Jewish Rabbins concerning the stability of the Messiahs Kingdome Thirdly That the words Princedome Government and for peace and spoken in a way of Prophesie of what should be added to the Church above that they injoyed already cannot but signifie more then Spirituals Fourthly That this is yet more apparent by that which followes both here and Luke 1.32 of the Messiahs sitting upon the Throne of DAVID and upon his Kingdome and to establish it with Justice and Judgement speaking in the phrase of an excellent politick Government It needs not that Christ should sit on Davids Throne and Kingdome to Spiritually governe and keep in peace his universall Church Nor needed there a Promise that Christs Spirituall Kingdome shall be established with Justice and Judgement which are low things to faith hope love joy in the Holy Ghost and the rest of the Graces of the holy Spirit Nor was there need to assert the perpetuity of Christs Spirituall Kingdome that it should be for ever the Jewes having now been a Church so many hundreds of yeares Fifthly The close in a way of Gods great engagement the zeale of the Lord of Hoast will performe this must of necessity signifie something more then the ordinary thing of Christs having a Spirituall Kingdome on earth What need such high words solemne protests and most serious pawning of the zeale of God which is love in a flame to signifie the performance of that which had been long since done and as an ordinary thing was to continue viz. Christs having a Spirituall Kingdome on earth Sixthly Both this of Isaiah and that of Luke 1.31 doth import That after there should be an interruption of the sitting of Davids race upon Davids Throne it should sensibly appeare that Christ should possesse that Throne else why is it here Prophesied that the Messiah shall sit upon Davids Throne and that the Lord God shall give to the Messiah the throne of his father David and promiseth there he shall sit for ever The whole Earth long before Gen. 1.26 c. compare Psal 8. Heb. 2. ver 7 8. being given up to the rule of Christ to be governed by his invisible providence was never interrupted but in all Ages Christ hath continually powred downe his Judgements upon the wicked as Peter proves in his second Epistle Chap. 2. And the Church was also given to him from the beginning Gen. 3.15 compare Rom. 16.20 which without any possible impediment he hath ever preserved on earth in all Ages ever since by his Spirituall power and grace But the Line of Davids race hath been broken off from his Throne as we shall see presently Nor hath Christ been upon it at all in any visible manifestation therefore this last must be a great part of the meaning of Isaiah and Saint Luke as Piscator expresseth it In solio Davidis tanquam haeres regni filius Davidis sedebit Christus confer 2 Sam. 7.12 c. so he And that to be performed for ever that is so as no visible power must reigne after him Seventhly Isaiah Prophesies in the time of the division of the Kingdome of the Jewes into Judah and Israel see chap. 1. ver 1. c. And Saint Luke tells us chap. 1. ver 33. that this must be fulfilled by Christs reigning over the whole house of Jacob which containes all the twelve Tribes made up of Israel and Judah even as according to Isaiah Christ must sit upon the Throne of David who ruled over both Judah and Israel Eighthly That all these must be so fulfilled that Christ must appeare to be wonderfull and mighty and to increase in his Government as Isaiah speaks and to be Great as Luke speakes § 6 Having thus digged into the meaning of the Text let us next lift up our eyes and take a view of all the Transactions of Christ since this Prophesie and see what of this text hath been really fulfilled Surely this text was not fulfilled in the Jewes returne from Babylon for the ten Tribes did not then returne to make up the house of Jacob or the Kingdome of David And besides of that prosperity there was soone an end in the miseries of the Maccabean Warres and the Roman Conquest was over them afore Christ was borne § 7 Nor was it ever fulfilled since Christs coming in the Flesh for he never yet sate upon the Throne of David nor any other deputatively for him of that Tribe the Scepter being then and thence to this day departed from Judah The visible Government as the text imports was not all this time upon Christs shoulders the time was not come as Christ tells us Act. 1.6 7. Act. 3.21 The visible Government since Christs coming in the Flesh hath been upon the shoulders of the Roman Emperour or the Pope or the Turke When the time comes that the Government shall be on Christs shoulders he shall reigne as David as Isaiah speakes and over the house of Jacob as Luke speakes that is over all the twelve Tribes and that for ever that is none visibly ruling them after him But at Christs Incarnation only two Tribes were about Jerusalem and Judea but under the Romans visible Government and for the generall refused Christs spirituall Government Act. 13.46 8 Nor can this be imagined rationally to be fulfilled in Christs Spirituall § 8 government for this Spiritual government if we may so call Christs giving of Ordinances and grace into the heart extending it self equally to Gentiles as wel as to Jewes if not more for these one thousand six hundred and fifty years past to the Gentiles what priviledge or preheminence is given in this to Jacobs House or Davids Throne more then to the houses or thrones of Constantine the Great or Charles the Great or of Edw. the sixth or of Q. Elizabeth or of the Indian Sagamores or of the Turkish Emperours or Grand-Signiours or of the great Chams of Tartar or c. when they or their Nations are converted at the coming in of the fulnesse of the Gentiles Besides who of Beleevers at the time of this Prophesie did not know that Christs Spirituall Kingdome of Grace should be for ever and full of more then Justice and Judgement viz. of all the graces of the
brightnesse of the Sunne shall be nothing to it At which time as it follows the Lord of Hosts in Christ Iesus saith Diodat shall reign on Mount Zion and in Ierusalem types of the universall Church and that in great glory before his Ancientours who were the Church of the Jews by blood as well as by Profession Christ being considered as man as the local circumstance of Zion and Ierusalem cals for that notion § 3 Calvin again cleerly intimateth in many circumlocutions that his sense of this Text is that Christ speaking in the future of time after Calvins time shall establish his Church on earth in a most glorious estate Ego non dubito quin persequatur Propheta c. That is I doubt not but that the Prophet prosecutes the consolation which he had touched in the former verse to this sense or effect when the Lord shall visite his people and shall purge his Church from their filthinesses he shall settle his Kingdome and that so illustrious that it shall obscure the Sunne and Stars with its splendor which kinde of speech is usuall with the Prophets as we have already seen But here Isaiah speaks of the BODY of the Church and not onely of the HEAD Seeing therefore the Lord will ESTABLISH HIS KINGDOME upon MOUNT ZION so great shall be the Magnificence thereof in the INSTAURATION of the People as that the things that otherwise shone in the sight of men shall now be as darknesse Which that he might expresse to the life be names these things that above all are most splendent The word RULING is improperly drawn to signifie Gods vengeance For although God be said to reigne when he acts the office of a Judge yet this speech so comprehending within it concerning THE KINGDOME of God in MOUNT ZION it alwayes hath the notation of mercy and salvation For hee speaketh of the RESTITUTION of the Church Whence it follows that this is not fulfilled but in Christ He making a precise mention of Elders or Ancients useth a Synecdoche which is exceeding usuall in Scripture For he taketh a speciall part of the Church for the whole body of the Church yet not without a consult purpose He calls by the name of Ancients as well the PRIESTS as other RULERS who were chiefe over Discipline and Manners by whose moderation and prudence the rest are to be governed Under their names he comprehends all the people not onely because they represent the whole body as under their shadow the people was covered but also that believers might conceive hope of a future ORDER For otherwise it would little or nothing profit that the multitude should be left dissipated in manner of a dis-membred body or confused Masse Neither is it impertinently added BEFORE the ANCIENTS that the Jewes might know that the power of God should be MANIFEST and ILLUSTRIOUS c. For SO HE REIGNES that wee may PERCEIVE HIM PRESENT WITH US For if it should be beyond our COMPREHENSION no COMFORT would redound to us thereby For GLORY others read GLORIOUSLY others GLORIOUS I had rather take it in the substantive GLORY although it makes no difference in the sense For it teacheth how great shall be the magnificence and glory of God by ERECTING THE KINGDOME OF CHRIST in that all splendor is obscured and ONLY the glory of Christ must be eminent and CONSPICUOUS Whence it follows that THEN at length God shall injoy HIS OWN RIGHT AMONG US and have his due honour WHEN ALL HIS CREATURES BEING GATHERED INTO ORDER he alone is RESPLENDENT IN OUR EYES Thus Calvin whose words and phrases here can bear no lesse then a sense favouring a visible glorious Kingdome of Christ on earth though something of it as he saith must be comprehended by faith above sense To which visibility of Christs Kingdome on earth the correlative in 22 and 23. verses answering to our relative THEN in our Text of punishing the Kings of the earth upon the earth c. doth strongly bear witnesse § 4 Now lay altogether and then judge when was this Text ever fulfilled Surely in a litterall sense as to corporall Transactions not at their returne from Babylon For then the Babylonians were not punished nor put in prison Nor were the Iews in an outward glorious condition but as in subjection still to Babylon and made a scorn by Sanballat Tobiah c. with the multitude of their adherents hindring their building discouraging their work raising lyes laying plots to indanger them So that they were as long neer upon in repairing the Temple and City of Ierusalem and setling the state thereof from the first that they began it as they had been in Captivity * See the book of Ezra Nehemiah and Haggi Nor was this Text of Isa litterally and corporally fulfilled to them at Christs being on earth being then also under captivity and reproach by the Romans †See the story of the Evangelists and Acts. and to this day in the same condition under them and all Nations in the world Nor hath this been yet fulfilled in a spiritual sense from that time to this day in that not one of ten thousand of the Gentiles admired their Levitical glory And their Ancients the Scribes Pharisees Elders and Rulers of the Synogogues and People generally opposed and persecuted Evanagelical glory And though for a spurt some few favoured the Gospel Act. 1. Act. 2. yet by and by they universally Act. 13. fell off from this Glory and so continued untill these our times § 5 Nor can these be fulfilled 〈◊〉 â—ltimate judgement For then Christ RULES not 1 Cor. 15. v. 24. v. 28. SECT XVI § 1 THe sixth place in Isaiah is that which followes at the heels of this viz. Chapter 25. throughout but especially from v. 7. to the end of the Chapter with some passages of the 26 Chapter being also a Song of praise for the glorious state of the Church to be especially those passages v. 14. v. 19. The late invention of Chapters may not hinder our prospect upon the continued sense of this Chapter inseparably depending on the former where in the last verse the Prophet having said THEN shall the Moon be confounded and the Sun ashamed WHEN the Lord of Hosts shall REIGN in Mount Zion and Ierusalem c. explained afore he now begins this Chapter with a solemne praise to God for his preparation to and manifestation of that his glorious Reign To give you the maine passages of the whole Chapter v. 1. O Lord thou art my God I will exalt thee c. v. 2. For thou hast made of a City an heap of a defenced City a ruine a palace of strangers to be no City it shall never be built v. 3. Therefore the strong people shall glorifie thee c. v. 4. For thou hast been a strength to the poore and needy in distresse a refuge from the storme a shadow from the heat when the blast of the terrible ones is a storme against the
of judgement as is fully discussed elsewhere in this Volume but do clearly comport with the beginning of the businesse of the great restauration at the generall call of the Jewes See in this third Book Chap. 2. Sect. 37. § 20. ¶ 5. c. So likewise the Apostle Paul applies the phrases and things of this 37 of Ezekiel to the times of the generall call of the Jewes Rom. 11.15 If the casting away of the Jewes be the reconciling of the World what shall be the receiving of the Jewes but LIFE FROM THE DEAD So likewise St. John in Revelation chap. 11.11 to 14 shewes plainly that the witnesses must first rise and then there was a great Earthquake and then the tenth part of the City of the whore of Babylon fals and thousands are slaine which things can have no fellowship with the ultimate day of judgement especially if we marke that the Earthquake the fall of the City and the slaughter are mentioned afore the sounding of the seventh Trumpet Now within the last of the space of which seventh Trumpet fals the ultimate judgement and therefore these things belong to the great restauration at the ruine of Antichrist and the call of the Jewes and the setting up of the glorious Church of Jewes and Gentiles for presently after ver 14 15. the seventh Trumpet sounds and the Kingdomes of the World become the Kingdoms of our Lord and of his Christ Thus of the places in Ezekiel SECT XXXV Next we come to Daniel The first place in this Prophet is in the second chapter from ver 31. to ver 36. § 1 NOw Mr. Medes lately printed Diatribae pars 4. and his Opuscula and my pen being met I shall give him the way and precedency as glad of such a strongly-learned Captaine to lead me up in the Skirmish for the truth now in hand against the many opposers thereof And the rather because perhaps such are the partiall-personalities that act some mens braines the same truth will be better accepted from his mouth then from mine Quo demum saith he * Opuscul par 2. p. 20. Arg. 2. absoluto c. i. e. The fourth Kingdom or Monarchy according to Daniel is that upon the dissolution and abolition whereof followes the consummation of Christs Kingdom * By Christs Kingdom which Mr. Mede doâ—h â—o often mention in these â—is discourses here quoted in this §. 1. he â—eans as he expounds it in other places of his workes CHRISTS CHURCH as CHRISTIAN or the CHRISTIAN CHURCH OF CHRIST See before in this third book chap. 2. Sect. 12 S. in the large marginal note But the Roman Kingdome being once extinct and abolished the Kingdom of Christ shall be consummated therefore the Roman Kingdome or Monarchy is the fourth The major or first proposition is most evident from either prophesie of Daniel As concerning Nebuchadnezzars dreame thou sawest saith he chap. 2. v. 34 35. untill a stone was cut out without hands and it smoate the image upon its feet of iron and clay so that it brake them to peeces So the wind carryed them away and no place was found for them But the STONE that smote the image became a great MOUNTAINE so that it filled the whole earth That is Daniel himselfe being the Interpreter in the dayes of the fourth Kingdome or Monarchy the God of Heaven will raise up a Kingdome this is that stone cut out of the mountain which shall not for ever be destroyed and which shall not be left to another people as it befell the former Monarchies but it shall crumme and consume all those Kingdoms but it selfe shall stand for ever that is the stone of Christs Kingdome having now for many ages past been cut out of the mountaine of this world at length when the time decreed of God shall come the last parts of this image being cast out and utterly abolished though hitherto it hath been but a STONE and indeed of offence or stumbling shall then grow into an HUGE MOUNTAINE and shall fill the whole earth For the minor or second proposition That the Roman Kingdome or Monarchy being once extinct and abolished the Kingdom or Monarchy of Christ shall be consummated it is easily proved out of the New Testament For by or from the abolition of Antichrist shall the Kingdome of Christ be consummated 2 Thes 2.8 And that wicked one shall be revealed whom the Lord will consume with the spirit of his mouth and shal abolish with the splendor or brightnes of his coming or as the Syriack shall kill him with the revelation or manifestation of his coming So also it is apparent out of the Apocalyps that Antichrist shall remaine till the sounding of the seventh that is the last Trumpet which once sounding there are great voyces in Heaven THE KINGDOMES OF THE WORLD ARE BECOME THE KINGDOMS OF OUR LORD JESUS CHRIST who shall reigne for ever and ever Rev. 11.15 the very same thing which the Angel a little afore Rev. 10.6 foretold That the seventh Trumpet sounding the MYSTERY OF GOD SHALL BE FINISHED as he hath declared to his servants the Prophets But Antichrist was to rise out of the Roman Empire 2 Thes 2.7 and Revel 16. John affirmes Antichrist to be one of the seven-headed beast The foure Kingdomes in Daniel are saith Mr. Mede * Diatr par 4. p. 361.393 twice revealed first to Nebuchadnezzar in a glorious image of foure metals 2 To Daniel himselfe in a vision of foure divers beasts arising out of the Sea The intent of both is by that succession of Kingdomes to point out the time of the KINGDOME OF CHRIST which no other Kingdome should succeed or destroy Nebuchadnezzars IMAGE of MONARCHIES Dan. 2. points out TWO STATES of the Kingdome of Christ The first to be while the times of those Kingdoms of the Gentiles yet lasted typified by a STONF CUT OUT OF A MOUNTAINE WITHOUT HANDS the Monarchical STATUE YET STANDING upon his FEET The second not to be untill the UTTER DESTRUCTION and DISSIPATION OF THE IMAGE when the stone having smote it upon the feet should GROW INTO A GREAT MOUNTAINE WHICH SHOULD FILL THE WHOLE EARTH The first may be called for distinction sake REGNUM LAPIDIS the Kingdome of the Stone which is the slate of Christs Kingdome WHICH HITHERTO HATH BEEN The other REGNUM MONTIS the Kingdome of the Mountain that is of the Stone growne into a Mountaine c. which is the state of his Kingdome which hereafter shall be The INTERVALLUM between these two from the time the stone was first hewen out that is the Kingdome of Christ was first advanced untill the time it became a MOUNTAINE that is when the MYSTERY OF GOD shall be FINISHED is the subject of the Apocalypticall visions Note here that the STONE is expounded by Daniel to be that LASTING KINGDOME which the God of Heaven should set up Secondly That the STONE was hewne out of the MOUNTAINE before it SMOTE the IMAGE upon the
FEET and consequently before the Image was DISSIPATED And therefore that the KINGDOME typified by the STONE while it remained a STONE must needs be within the TIMES OF THOSE MONARCHIES that is before the last of them viz. the Roman should expire Wherefore Daniel interprets vers 44. of this second chapter That IN THE DAYES of these Kingdomes not after them but while some of them were in being the God of Heaven should set up a Kingdome WHICH SHOULD NEVER BE DESTROYED nor LEFT as the other were to another people but should BREAKE IN PEECES and CONSUME ad those Kingdomes and it selfe should stand for ever And all this he speaks as the INTERPRETATION of the STONE FOR AS MUCH saith he AS THOU SAWEST THAT A STONE WAS CUT OUT OF THE MOUNTAIN WITHOUT HANDS AND THAT IT BRAKE IN PEECES THE IRON THE BRASSE THE CLAY THE SILVER AND THE GOLD Here make the full point for these words belong not to that which followes as our Bibles misse-distinguishing seem to refer them but to that which went afore of their interpretation But the STONE becoming a Mountaine he expounds not but leaves to be gathered by what he had already expounded So then IN THE DAYES OF THOSE KINGDOMES of the Gentiles signifies DURING THEM and in the latter part of them as the nature of the thing spoken of sufficiently argues which was to destroy the last Kingdome which had destroyed and swallowed the former three I mean the second swallowed or possessed the first the third the second the fourth the third and so in a sence by the destruction of the fourth the STONE destroyeth all the rest as contained therein For the stone smites neither the golden part nor the silver nor the brasse immediately but onely the feet of iron and clay and yet by that blow was the brasse the silver and the gold destroyed also in as much as they all came by succession to the iron I adde that the dissipation of the gold silver and brasse together with the Iron may bee 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 typi the comlinesse or conveniency of the type because the parts of the Image in the type could not succeed one another in time as the Kingdomes signified by them did and so the Image appeared to be dissipated all at once in vision though the Kingdomes were not so save only in the sence afore-named Thus Mr. Mede to whom I assent almost in all things I have other good company to goe along with me in this point upon this Chapter but I must first premise some things to make way for them You have in this second Chapter of Daniel from ver 36. to ver 46. the prophesie of this visibly-glorious Kingdome of Christ to bee on earth given by God to Nebuchadnezzar in a dream of a great Image ver 31. c. of foure Mettals in the foure parts thereof the Head being of gold the Brest and Armes of silver the Belly and Thighes of brasse the Leggs and Feete of Iron but in the feet a mixture of clay and to Daniel by the spirit of propheticall revelation to interpret it according to the true intent and meaning of Gods mind therein According to which in ver 37 38. Daniel tels Nebuchadnezzer that he the said Nebuchadnezzar is the first part of the first metal viz. the Head of gold in that the God of Heaven had given him a Kingdom or Empire viz. the Assyrio-Chaldean and power and strength and glory Why further hee is called a golden head wee shall annex more conveniently by and by In ver 39. Daniel tels him that after him shall arise an inferiour Kingdom which he applies to the Breast and Armes of silver mentioned afore in verse 32. which fitly resembles the Empire that next followed viz. the Medo Persian Which taking the said golden head when Darius Dan. 5. tooke Babylon added to it this breast of Empire with the two armes of Medes and Persians And therefore this silver Empie is called inferiour not in respect of power authority or Territory wherein it was greater by taking to it selfe that of the former and adding its own but in manner of Government as in relation to the Church being far more harsh to the Jewes till the last then the former The Jewes injoying golden dayes in comparison under Nebuchadnezzars Empire although he was the first that took the Kingdome from the Jewes Which is the reason why the sacred storie of the Jewish Churches foraigne State begins at Nebuchadnezzar calling him the head when as the Empire of Assyria and Chaldea was long afore him in being viz. the Scripture takes no notice of the Kingdomes of Heathens or of the world further then as they concerne the woe or weale of the Church This Nebuchadnezzar therefore beginning the desolation of the Church of the Jewes as to their Temple-worship and habitation in the injoyment of these in their own Land is called the head of that monstrous Image of Monarchy In the same 39 verse Daniel tells him that after that second Empire of silver shall arise a third of brasse which metall though otherwise not expresse intimates by the order and proportion of descention and degeneration in calling the silver one inferiour to the golden that this third brazen one shall be as much baser and worse if not more in the sence aforesaid then the second of silver as the silver was worse then the gold And this was to signifie the Grecian Empire or Monarchy Alexander the Great being the Belly that possessed it in whole and his two Commanders succeeding him are the two thighes or hips For though foure at first shared it yet all by their disagreeing and striving soon fell into the hands of those two Whereof one had the Northern moyety or half called therefore the King of the North the other the Southern called thereupon the King of the South as you have the matter at large by way of prophesie Dan 11. to which the best Histories since doe exactly answer But of this more after when we come to the eleventh of Daniel In ver 40 41 42.43 Daniel tells Nebuchadnezzar that the fourth Kingdome Empire or Monarchy shall be of iron and clay Thereby signifying a baser state then the former in the sence afore-explained And this must of necessity signifie the Roman Empire which next followed the Grecian conquering it as Dan. 9. prophesies and Histories since singularly shew the performance In the days of this Iron Empire Christ comes ver 44. Imperante Augusto natus est Christus Imperante Tiberio crucifixus is known to every School-boy that hath learned his Grammer He came in the time of the Roman Empire not in the time of the Grecian or any of the former And this Roman Empire is described by and called Iron because it was harder and hardier to breake the former and more cruell as wee afore intimated to the Church Witnesse the Vespasian-Titan cruelty prophesied by Christ Matth. 24.1 c. to come to
passe as it did about forty yeares after Christs ascension and so along with it and afore and downeward throughout the ten persecutions for three hundred yeares in all the Roman Emperours successively most bloodily and with variety of torments persecuted the Church in innumerable multitudes in all Countries under their expanse Dominion This Empire though at Christs birth was for a time united if we may so say in the twist of the two legges or thighes as the two brazen hips were at first in the belly yet a while after it is divided into Two two thighes or legges and feet with their ten Toes and those Feet and Toes are mixt with clay among the iron That is it was divided into the Eastern and Western Empire Constantinople being the Metropolis of the Eastern and Rome of the Western and so opportunely fell into subdivisions till it answered exactly to these ten Toes and Saint Johns Beast with ten Hornes And they are mingled with clay because now the generality of the Church as they seemed in outward profession much degenerated mingled themselves with the dirty seed and sonnes of men that is the Heathen and men of the world that were out of the Church according to that phrase Gen. 6.2 that is the Papacy or Papal Church as they pretended to be and their issue incorporated themselves with the civill State powers All which can fit to none so aptly as to the Roman Empire The marriages between the King of the North and the King of the South were both and all of the seed of men and therefore the mixture aforesaid is not applicable to them As for the division of the Empire it is divided to this day the Mahomitan Turke in severall respects aforesaid rising out of the Romans though otherwise in part a Jew by blood hath the Constantinopolitan Eastern part and the Emperiall Pontificiall Pope hath the Roman Western Thus you see how largely Daniel by Gods Spirit of propheticall revelation shewes us the succession and successe of the foure great Monarchies of the earth extending from before Daniel down to us â—preading themselves over the face of the earth and how the latter eat up the former making it selfe fatter and stronger thereby Now what should be the design of the Heavenly Church-loving God so much to minde matters of State and worldly Polities and in a prophesie to his spirituall world-slighting Church surely a very considerable one viz. to the end he might methodically for their better capacity and understanding prophesie to them of a fifo Monarchy or Empire or Kingdome bigger and better then any of the former to follow at the heeles yea to tread upon the toes of the fourth and that by a glorious conquest So that as curious wits speake of Quintessentia the quintessence of beings so this shall be the quintessence of what ever was good in all the foure preceding with an addition of celestial divine and infused and superfused grace and glory This fifth Monarchy is immediately under Christ then the sole Emperour thereof And this must as really orderly and assuredly succeed after and prevaile over all the Places Powers and Territories of the former as they followed and foiled one another So that this fift Monarchy must as really and sensibly be upon earth as any of the preceding were as Daniel with all might and maine of phrase strives according to Gods dictating most plainly to set forth § 3 In this very sence of this notable place of Daniel to that end I have very learned and pious men to go along with me viz. Mr. Huet on Daniel Mr. Parker in his Visions and Prophesies of Daniel expounded and Mr. Archer in his personall reign of Christ You shall heare them themselves speake and urge their own Proofes Reasons and Arguments that you may the better see cause to justifie them and not condemn me of singularity § 4 The sum of Mr. Huet is this The fift Kingdom is made up of the state of the Jewes who out of their dead and desolate estate in regard of piety and polity are awakened by God and brought to the embracement of Christian Religion and to unite into a Kingdome who were as dead men under the flourishing state of the Empire of Rome But in the declining condition of that Roman Empire the Jewes are to be awakened by God and to be re-established into their former Kingdom with great glory and large command ash us ¶ 1. Such a Kingdome is here intended as was by the foure mettals with-held from the Jewes who of all Noahs posterity were the just heires of the world C ham was to be a Servant and Japhet was to dwell in the Tents of Shem as one of his family Shem being the head of that family That such a Kingdome must bee here meant appears in that the Image stands up at the instant of the Jews losse of Soveraignty being made Vassals to the CHALDEANS by captivity 2. In that this fifth Kingdome as it relates to the Jewes for the Christian Gentiles must by no means bee dissevered began to be raised up to his greatnesse at the time of the battering of the Image Now had this Kingdome been meerly spirituall it needed not to have staid for the overthrow ☞ of the Image before it filled the earth seeing Christs spirituall Kingdome doth not overthrow but rather set up civil Government and the Gospel hath flourished where the Church hath been under Tyranny ¶ 2. It is such a Kingdome as doth break in peeces all the former Metals viz. smites the feete and so demolisheth the Image Now ☞ the spirituall Kingdome of Christ doth rather invest then dis-robe earthly Kings and Emperours commanding obedience to them whether good or bad as the Scriptures abundantly mention This smiting of the feet is left out as a Cypher by them that interpret it spiritually of the preaching of the word Consider then if this ☞ were meant of the preaching of the Gospell discovering the vanitie of earthly things how glorious soever why should it not rather strike at the more glorious Mettals Is there any sence that Christ should declaime against the base things of the world and passe by the eminent States or should wee thinke that a conviction wrought in Syria-Egypt as some by these make up the account of the fourth Mettal should occasion the other States to yeeld to the imbracement of the faith of Christ themselves being strangers to his Sermons Sure I am the conversion of Nations to the faith costs more adoe Or lastly dare any say that our Lord either by his own person or Apostles did first preach to the States of Syria and Egypt before any other Countries Is there not cleare evidence of the conversion of other Churches before clay-footed Syria-Egypt How then is the stone said immediately to smite the feet rather then any other part of the Image Surely these and the like improbabilities we fall into by intending hence Christs ministry of the Gospell
〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The Lord. The Reconciliation Mr. Mede would reconcile these places thus 1. That for 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the Article he would read 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the Lord. And for 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Edom he would read 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Adam or Man And for 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that they may possess 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that they may seek after And he doth suppose the Septuagint and the Apostle and Evangelist did follow some such copie and upon that ground supplyed the word Lord and altered the word Edom to Adam or man and the word possess to seek after and so read That the remnant of Adam or man may seek after the Lord. To which conjecture or reading I can contribute a little something To the first this that some copies of the Septuagint have instead of 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Lord 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Me as relating to the Lord Which is not onely reported by Nobilius but I have the like Greek copy by me To the second this That Edom by the Hebrewes is used commonly to signifie the Nations that were not of their Jewish Church and especially those under the Roman Monarchy And therefore the Jesuites have expunged out of the Hebrew Rabbins Commentaries on the Hebrew Bibles printed within their reach the word Edom oftentimes as it is to be seen in the edition of Buxtorfes great Hebrew Bible with the Chalde and Rabbins compared with that of Bomberg To the third this That some copies of Jeroms Latine Translation have quaerant me may seeke after mee See De Dieu in his Animady in Act Apostol And his Animadvers on Clav. Apocal. De Dieu * conveniently salves the matter and saves the Hebrew text without any supply or alteration of any one word at all thus Act. 15.17 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. that is that the residue of men might seeek after the Lord. These words are fetched from Amos 9.12 where the Hebrew Text hath it thus 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. which is wonted to be translated that they may possess the remnant of Edom and all Nations Gentiles or Heathens which version of the words seems to me most harsh to reconcile with this place of the Acts But not so if we say that 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 here is not a note of the Accusative Case but as often else-where of the Nominative and we turn it That the remnant of Edom and of all the Heathen on whom my name is called may possess the restored Tabernacle of David Neither is there any doubt with me but that the Septuagint so tooke the words for so they turne them 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. i.e. That the rest of men and all Nations Gentiles or Heathens may seek after Which words have no sence unlesse thou dost supply in thy understanding what they are to seek after to wit that which but even now he had spoken of viz. the Tabernacle of David that was thrown downe but now restored Instead of which James doth not ill substitute the words 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The Lord. For whether thou sayst that they should seek after The restored Tabernacle or after the Lord the restorer and Master of that Tabernacle still thou sayest the same thing Adde that the Gentiles or Nations should seek after that Tabernacle not for its own sake but for the Lords sake Here also must be shewne why instead of 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that they may possess the Septuagint saies 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that they may seek after Whether or no because for 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that they may possess they read 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that they may seeke after So t is commonly thought But let leave be granted to conjecture another matter This is to bee held as a rule or tenet amongst all the Orientals that words which signifie Esse that is to be doe also signifie fieri that is about to be done that is moveriad esse viz. to be moved towards that same esse or being As 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 signifies to open and to let loose Because loosening is a moving towards apertion 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 signifies to possess and to buy Because buying is a moving towards possession there are hundreds of the same sort So 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 doth not onely signifie to possess but to move toward possession For example Deut. 2.24 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Begin Possess 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and conflict with him in war They could not actually begin to possesse before they had conflicted and cast out the enemy The sence therefore is Begin to enter upon the possession And more clearly ver 32. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which if we render with Pagnin Begin thou to possess that thou mayst possess his land is a meer Tautologie but not so if you render it Begin thou to enter upon the possession c. So in this place 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 That they may possess the Septuagint conceived did signifie not the possession it selfe but the endeavour of possessing which they happily enough expressed by a verb of seeking Nor is it wonder that they translated 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The remnant of Edom by 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The remnant of men For perhaps they read it 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Adam or rather they tooke the word Edom in this place as often elsewhere to bee of a larger signification then to note the people properly so called For as Isaack the younger of Rebeckahs sonnes did typifie forth the Church so the elder ESAU or EDOM did typifie all other men that were strangers from the Church Wherefore in the writings of the Rabbins the Roman Empire especially whiles overspreading the whole world was called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the Kingdome of Edom who also by 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the Sons of Edom do understand all Christians That wee said 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 sometimes notes the Nominative Case if any should perhaps grant that after Verbs Passives but deny it in other Verbs let him see 2 King 9.25 Neh. 9.34 1 Sam. 17.34 2 Kin. 6.5 Eze. 43.7 Jer. 33.5 where it is so construed with Neuters Yea sometimes with Transitives as Neh. 9.34 Jer. 38.16 Eze. 39.14 * Hence it comes to passe that 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which otherwise of the Accusative Case doth among the Rabbins with all the Verbs promiscuously make the Nominative Case as 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 He did it or he made or made it Plainly therefore both the Hebrew and the Greek both waies signifie the conversion of the Jews and Gentiles first AL ISRAEL next Rom. 11. into a cohabitation and Church-union Which is very aptly opened and inlarged in the very next Prophet viz. the Prophet Obadiah and with many of the same words and phrases with addition of others Obad. ver 17 18 19 20 21. But upon MOUNT ZION shall be deliverance and there shall be
in opposition to both sorts of evils immediately afore recounted viz. not only to false Doctrines but to cruell persecutions and therefore a corporal as well as a spiritual salvation must be here meant and these to be performed on earth viz. in the inhabited world just where the Gospel preached converted them and where they endured to the end And unto which Christ doth gloriously appear FROM heaven ver 30 c. to make up the splendor of that state on earth we here speak of Now all these things cannot be fulfilled at the ultimate generall judgement nor are they hitherto fulfilled and therefore they remaine yet to be fulfilled which Mr. Mede solidly amplifies on Jer. 10. ver 11. thus Hitherto saith he we have spoken of the accomplishment of this prophecy for so much as is already past now let us see what that is which we expect as yet to come for though in regard of former times when Ethnicisme was so large and the worshipers of the living God so small a scantling the extent of the Church be now at this day a goodly and large portion of the world yet if we consider the number of Nations yet Pagans or not Christians it will seem too scant as yet to be the accomplishment of this and other prophecies concerning the largenesse of Christs Kingdome before the end of the world For one hath well observed that Christianity at this day is not above the sixth part of the knowne world whereas the Mahumetans have a fifth and all the rest are Ethnicks and Pagans So that if we divide the world into thirty parts Christianity is but as five in thirty Mahumetanism as six and Ethnicisme as nineteen and so is Christianity the least part of all and plain Heathenism hath far above the one half of the known world and the better part of the other is also Mahumetans And though Christianity hath been imbraced in former times where now it is not yet is it now spread in those places where in those times it was not And therefore all laid together we may account Christianity at this day as large I think as ever it was since the Apostles time But that this is not that universal Kingdome of Christ that flourishing and glorious estate of the Church which yet we expect hope for my reasons are these First These frequent places of Scripture which intimate that the Lord should subdue all People all Kingdoms all Nations and all the ends of the earth unto himselfe and that all these should one day worship and acknowledge him Psal 22.27 All the ends of the world shall turn unto the Lord and all the kindreds of the nations shall worship before him for the Kingdome is the Lords and he is governor among the Nations And Psal 47. Clap your hands all yee people for the Lord is a great King over all the earth he shall subdue the people under us and the nations under our feete And againe God is King of all the earth and reigneth over the Heathen Psal 66. Make a joyfull noise unto God all yee-lands through the greatness of thy power shall thine enemies submit themselves unto thee aâ— the earth shall worship thee and sing of thee they shall sing unto thy Name The whole Psal 67. which we read every day is as it were a prophecy and prayer for this great kingdome That the way of God may be knowne upon earth and his saving health among all the Nations let the people praise thee O God let all the people praise thee Then shall the earth yeeld her increase c. God shall blesse us and all the ends of the earth shall fear him And Psal 89. All nations whom thou hast made shall come and worship before thee O Lord and shall glorifie thy Name for thou art great and doest wondrous things thou art God alone And Isa 2. which is a prophecy of Christs Kingdome it is said That the Idols the Lord shall utterly abolish or as some read the Idols shall utterly passe away So Esay 54.5 speaking of the amplitude of the Church of the Gentiles Thy Redeemer saith the Prophet the holy one of Israel the God of the whole earth shall be called Certainly this constant stile of universality implies more then this scantling which yet is small being but one of the least parts of the whole earth Secondly The same conclusion may be gathered from 1 Cor. 15.25 26. compared with Heb. 2.8 Christ must reigne saith St. Paul in the first place quoted till he hath put all his enemies under his feet the last enemy which shall be destroyed is death Hence it followes that Christ shall subdue all his enemies whereof the Prince of this world is the cheife before the last rising of the dead for the subduing of death that is the rising of the dead shal not be afore the rest shall be done the vanquishing of death being the last act of Christs reigning which done he shall yeeld up the Kingdome unto his Father In the other place Heb. 2.8 the Apostle speaking of the same thing alleadgeth that of Psal 8. Thou hast put all things in subjection under his feet and then adds for in that he put all in subjection under him But now marke it we see not all things put under him If any say that the Apostle speakes here of the Kingdome of Glory in Heaven and not of the Kingdom of Grace on Earth I reply first out of the former place that he speaks of such a subjection whereof the rising of the dead shall be the last act of all and which shall be before he yeelds up the kingdome to his Father But neither of these can be affirmed of the kingdome of glory but the contrary viz. The rising of the dead is at the beginning and not at the end of the Kingdome of glory and so is also his yeelding up of his kingdom unto his Father Secondly I reply out of this place that the Apostle speaks of that kingdome and subjection of the earth or state of the earth which was to come For so he speaks v. 5. Unto the Angels he hath not put in subjection 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the earth or state of the earth which shal be 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 of which we speak Here he affirms that 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 is that of whose subjection he meaneth If then 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 signâ—â—â—s onely the earth ' and the earths inhabitants and is no where in the Scripture otherwise used I cannot see how this place can well beare any other exposition First then to confirme this 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 is the same which the Hebrews call 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 for so the Septuagint renders it whose use of speaking I doubt not but the Apostle followes But 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 most constantly signifies the habitable earth or the earth with the things that live and dwell therein whence the Septuagint though they commonly render it 〈◊〉 〈◊〉
and power vers 25. For he must reigne till hee hath put all enemies under his feet vers 26. The last enemy that shal be destroyed is death vers 27. For he hath put all things under his feet but when he saith all things are put under his feet it is manifest that he is excepted which did put all things under him vers 28. And when all things shal be subdued unto him then shal the Son also himselfe be subject unto him that put all things under him that God may be all in all § 1 VVHat I have largely Commented on these words for explication of the one hundred and tenth Psalme all in order to our point in hand see before * Pag. 166. P. 6. and p. 167. 168. as worth while for the reader to consider especially seeing that is premised we have the lesse need to be large now and so shall omit the repetition here of severall considerable things there asserted § 2 M. M. On this place hath these words first he analyseth upon â—hem in generall thus Every one must rise in his owne order Christ the First-fruits after they that are Christs therefore not the Martyrs only then cometh the end What presently after his coming No but when he hath delivered the Kingdome to God the Father meaning the ultimate end And when shall that be that he shall deliver up the Kingdome to God the Father When hee shal have put downe all rule and authority and power for he must reigne till he that is God the Father hath put all his enemies under his feet which will be fully accomplished where hee plainly mindes as aforesaid the ultimate end when the last enemy shal be destroyed which is death And when all things shall be thus subdued unto him shall follow unutterable glory the height of happinesse so he Which last clauses must warily be understood with this distinction That the destruction of Death as an enemy to the Saints and Christs visible Kingdome on earth of which we speake is the beginning and introduction to Christs and the Saints reigning in that Kingdome For that Kingdome and the thousand yeares of glory to Christ and happinesse to the Saints on earth begins with the resurrection of the deceased Saints Revel 11.11 12 c. and Rev. 20.4 5. often explained afore But the putting an end to death in the raising of the wicked unto the ultimate generall Judgement that it may no longer be an enemy to Gods ultimate designe of punishing the said wicked body and soule with everlasting punishment is indeed the end or period of Christs reigning Revel 20.12 Secondly our Author Commenteth on the generall of this place of 1 Cor. 15 thus Pauls words saith he doe clearly prove that the reigne of Christ as Man of which alone we treat doth neither begin before his second coming nor extend it selfe beyond the last resurrection and therefore cannot without a palpable contradiction be taken for the time when he shal give up his Kingdome to his Father or for the time that now is Betwixt which and his Kingdome our Saviour in my conceit hath put an irreconcilable distinction calling this not the time of a Kingdome but a time of temptation * See a little before in this fourth chap. Sect. 4. on Luke 22.28 c. that is a time of persecution for righteousnesse sake that thus fulfilling the rest of the afflictions of Christ for his bodies sake which is his Church they may at last wholly and together in body and soule reigne with Christ but their bodies as yet shall be captive in the Grave Or shal the Saints that are found alive at his coming be exempted from that his Kingdome For if he shall reign till then and then give up his Kingdome to his Father they are exempted But if as our Apostle shewes here his reigning begins not til his coming viz. his second coming then at that time the living and dead in Christ shal wholly and altogether reigne with him on earth 3. In particular our Author Paraphraseth on that clause After they that are Christs thus These words saith he doe shew that there is some distance of time between the Resurrection of them in Christ and other men or else it had been easie for the Apostle to have said They that are dead or they that are in the Grave And if there shall be a precedency of time then no doubt it shall be such a precedency of time as may bring some advantage and honour to the Saints and therefore not of a few houres or dayes but of a more notable continuance of many yeares For if Christ shall descend for no other purpose but to call men to Judgement as there would be no need of distinction of time so there could not well be any priority of time to distinguish their resurrection because in that act both good and bad must be assembled before him at the same time and the wicked doubtlesse should then be raised as soon to see his coming as the just to meet and accompany him there To all this I have now but a few words to adde my former discusse p. 166. excusing me here and that is this That the Apostle in this text hints to us three Physicall resurrections 1 The Resurrection of Christ which the Apostle saith is past vers 20. and there and ver 23. cals it the first fruits of the Saints Resurrection 2 The Resurrection of the wicked also called the end vers 24. which also followes the second at a distance 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 as the gleaning doth the harvest and this succession is that which the Apostle calls ver 23. order each to rise in his owne order and it is a very distinct order for as there hath been now above one thousand six hundred yeares since Christs resurrection and yet the Saints are not risen so it wil be a thousand yeares between the resurrection of the Saints and the wicked as Saint John asserts Rev. 20. oft and much insisted upon afore And as at the resurrection of the Saints death as to them shall be destroyed so at the resurrection of the wicked life to them shall be destroyed their living being worse then death and therefore called the second death which over the Saints shall have no power because of the blessed life they are restored to Revelations 20. and first twelve verses SECT VIII The eighth place in the New Testament for the glorious state of the Church yet to come before the ultimate generall Judgement is 2 Cor. 3.15 16 17 18. vers 15. But even unto this day when Moses is read the vaile is upon their heart vers 16. Neverthelesse when it shall turne to the Lord the vaile shall be taken away Vers 17. Now the Lord is that Spirit and where the Spirit of the Lord is there is liberty vers 18. But or and or truly we all with open face beholding as in a glasse the glory of the Lord are
beleeved and reported by Eusebius But by the best Antiquity Cerinthus is quitted Gaius doubted of and suspected Dionysius blamed and Eusebius reproved And to make these things good against them we produce Irenaeus Tertullian and Epiphanius And to conclude wee give you there Mr. Medes answer to the said Gaius Dionysius and Eusebius Thus we have repeated the more lest some should not take the paines to read the fore-quoted places But let us leave the tayle of the Argument and wound the head and heart of it and then the heels will easily fall ¶ 1 To the major Proposition and first to the first clause that The conceit of the thousand yeers makes Christs Kingdome to be earthly We answer It no more it makes earthly then to say the Church of Christ on earth makes the Church of Christ earthly because all this while it hath been on earth which notwithstanding is called heavenly Gal. 4.26 Heb. 12.22 Again the Angels businesses are with the Church on earth and about earthly things in relation to the Churches welfare Heb. 1. Dan. 10. yet it follows not that they are therefore earthly To the second clause of the major It makes Christs Kingdome most observable for all worldly glory Answer Though this Kingdome shall have observable for outward glory according to Rev. 21. Kings and Nations shall bring their honour to it yet it doth not follow that we say it shall be most observable for that But for the speciall manifestation of God and the Lamb and all the spirituall beams irradiating from them Rev. 21. dispelling all uncleanness and spiritualizing every thing so that though they injoy the earth upon earth yet not in an earthly manner Sure then shal that be much more verified in 1 Cor. 10.31 and Phil. 3.20 Their conversation is in heaven and doe all to the glory of God ¶ 2 To his minor Proposition First to the first clause But the Scriptures makes it to be spiritual without all Worldly pomp I Answer words are as they are intended In English pomp and vanity are much of the same sense But if by pomp Mr. B. means outward glory Christ hath promised it abundantly in many places of the old Testament before alleadged And also in the new Testament in many places of which afore and particularly in Rev. 21. throughout To the second clause of his minor Neither doth the word of God make the Kingdome of the Mediator of two kinds and of a different nature We answer As all orthodox Divines do distinguish the Church of the Mediator into visible and invisible yet do say and Mr. B. can see it as well as I that they doe not distinguish the Church into severall kinds so it is in this As notwithstanding that in Heb. 1.1 The Church and Word are still of the same kinde and nature in Essence To the third clause of his minor The Word makes the Church one uniform from the beginning to the end We answer This word Uniform is variously used by Prelates and Presbyters which variety doth arise from Diocess and Classes But we thinke if we distinguish of an internal and an external form we shall satisfie the objection The Church is one Uniforme Church in the internal form which is union in and with Christ and through him with one another Eph. 4. And yet this doth not hinder the Church in several ages to have several external formes In Adams standing it was outwardly most glorious as well as inwardly perfect In the ten Fathers time afore the Flood it was in Families with a mean outward glory In the time of Tabernacle made by Moses and of the Temple built by Solomon it had a world of glorious types and abundance of pomp i. e. outward glory In the New Testament in the first 300 yeers it was mean in Constantine M. c. a great deal of outward glory But again of late times in many places very mean yet still wee truly confesse one universal Church in kinde nature essence and internal forme why therefore should it make an objection that when Christs time shall come that is greater then Constantine the Great then Moses then Solomon then Adam that HEE shall make the Church as internally and spiritually most exact so externally glorious If there be any outward glory on earth it shall not be in the hands of the foure Monarchies or any part thereof but in the hands of the Saints considered as the Church not as the world For then the world shall bee Churched Christ not Bishops Christs Spirit not their Liturgy or Letany or Collects shall Church her and give her an Hallelujah for her safe delivery and fulfill that neither the Sunne of worldly power nor the Moon of worldly things shall fright her any more For that Psalme is meant of the Church ¶ 3 To his proofs of the minor viz. That the Scripture makes the Kingdome of the Mediator to be spiritual without all worldly pompe and that neither doth the word of God make that Kingdome to be of two kindes and of two different natures but one and uniforme from the beginning to the end I say that proof he brings for this will be too short by many rounds to reach all this pompe of words in which he dresseth forth his minor Proposition Let us examine his proofs by particulars First that in Luke 1.32 The Lord shall give him the Throne of his Father David and he shall reigne over the house of Jacob for ever Now we aske the question Doth this make out all the straines of Mr. B. minor Nay we have largely shewed this place mightily confirmes our opinion and overthrows the contrary See before Book 3. Chap. 4. Sect. 2. page 383. c. I am loath to spend time and paines in repetition and so to swell this Treatise with unnecessaries I will onely aske Mr. B. where or when yet was fulfilled this same SHALL And WHERE is DAVIDS THRONE now And how doth Christ reigne over the HOUSE of JACOB in any part or in any manner in inward and outward glory To his second proof 1 Cor. 15.25 He must reigne till he have put all things under him We answer first by a question doth this place prove all the clauses of his minor Is here one word to say that in Christs Kingdome there is but one way of ruling that there is but one Kingdome meerly spiritual and in no wise worldly Yea doth not this Text speak the contrary whâ—n it faith all his things as Mr. B. alleadgeth it must be put under his feet Surely this intimates a great alteration of the world that the world shall submit to Christ for the good and service of the Church as many places in the Old Testament doe gloriously inlarge Mr. B. quips us with a Socino-remonstration But sure it is plaine Familisme to turne plaine places into Allegories To the third proof in Luke 17.20 The Kingdome of God commeth not with observation Neither shall they say Lo here or lo there
for behold the Kingdome of God is within you We answer first That these words were spoken to the Pharisees ibid. vers 20 to them it should not come with observation 2 To them enquiring after another state of Christs Kingdome mean while over-looking and neglecting its present state whiles Christ was personally with them and opposing him No wonder therefore that to such hypocrites so acting Christ would not discover the glorious visible state of his Church to come 3. The word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 observation it signifies Divination or Augury Bud. And the Apostle applies the Theam 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 to reprove the Galatians for observing dayes and months and yeers and times therefore Chemnitius sayes truly it signifies a scrupulous superstitious observation And oft in the New Testament it is put to signifie in the Theam a captious insidiatory malicious observation to carp and catch Luke 6.7 Chap. 14. vers 1 Chap. 20. vers 20. The great learned Philosopher a Natural Greek and therefore knew his owne tongue in his Rhet. l. 2. useth it for observing a fit time to revenge Now the Pharisees were exquisite at both sorts of observation viz. superstitions of washing c. and insidiatory See Luke 20.20 They watched him it is the same Greek word and sent forth spies c. This being the efficacy of the Greek word and this being the spirit and temper of the Pharisees no wonder that Christ sayes to them the Kingdome of God doth not come with such observation or to such observers But fourthly we answer that Christ doth not deny but that his Kingdome may be perceived and beheld by a serious and sincere observaton As first his Kingdome of the ministration of the Gospel So that there shall bee no need to say Lo here or lo there is the Kingdome while the Kingdome of God is AMONG YOU verse 21. q. d. you might see it as well as others if you were sincerely willing to see it Our Translators render it The Kingdome of God is within you But most improperly for sure the Kingdome of God was not within these Pharisees who most likely put this question to Christ insidiatorily Beside the Greek 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 commonly signifies among or on this side or on that side or in the middle or amidst and so Beza and the Hebrew our Syriack copy have it And Beza saith it answers 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 apud vos among you And his words on this place and phrase is very considerable to our purpose This particle 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 saith Beza signifies that so the Kingdome of God was among them that by no means could it lye hid but was obvious to the beholding of all as John speaks Chap. 1. v. 27. But perhaps it doth declare that they had it not onely neer them but also within that is they had the Messiah within their houses so that but for perverse opinion c. they might acknowledge him There are some saith Beza who had rather render it WITHIN you as if it were signified there that the Kingdome of Christ were spiritual not earthly c. which opinion however it is true yet perhaps it is not sufficiently accommodated to this place Secondly For Christs more glorious and more conspicuous Kingdome at his next appearing he saith verse 22 23 24. and 25. to his Disciples Goe not after men that say here or there it is in this or that corner for as the lightning that lightneth out of the one part under heaven shineth unto the other part under heaven so also shall the Sonne of man be in his day But first hee must suffer many things and be REJECTED OF THIS GENERATION which plainly signifies his next comming after his Ascension Lay all together and you will see how little Mr. B. gets out of this place for his minor To his fourth proof thereof Job 18.36 My Kingdome is not of this world we have answered largely afore To his fifth and last proofe of his minor Rom. 14.16 The Kingdome of God consists not c. we gave a full answer when we answered the closing up of this his Argument SECT V. Mr. Bailyes fifth Argument § 1 THe Scripture makes the Church of God so long as it is upon earth first a mixed multitude of elect and reprobate good and bad Secondly A company of people under the crosse and subject to various temptations Thirdly A company that hath need of the Word and Sacraments of Prayer and Ordinances Fourthly That hath Christ a high Priest within the vayle of heaven interceding for them But the Doctrine in hand changes the nature of the Church and makes it for a 1000 yeers together to consist only of good gracious persons without all trouble without all Ordinances without any need of Christs Intercession For the first of mixedness see Mat. 13.40.24.11 Luk. 18.8 These places declare the mixture of the wicked with the godly in the Church to the worlds end and most about the end For the second of Crosses See Psal 34.20 Many are the afflictions of the righteous Matth. 5.4 Blessed are they that mourne and are persecuted Act. 14.23 By many tribulations we must enter into the Kingdome of God Rom. 8.17 If we suffer with him we shall reigne with him 2 Tim. 3.12 All that will be godly must suffer persecution For the third of Ordinances see Eph. 4.11 1 Cor. 11.26 For the fourth of need of Christs Intercession see 1 John 1.8 and Chapter 2.1 Heb. 9.24 § 2 Answer first to the major Mr. B. himselfe cannot but confesse that it is not simply and absolutely true For if Christ will judge the whole world upon the earth on earth shall be the place of Judicature and bodies must be in a place for at heaven the wicked shall not be to receive sentence and onely the Saints at last are caught up into the clouds 1 Thess 4.17 And Christ as man must judge men as men and so have time to make his judgement apparently just to all mens reason and so as some of the Presbyterians confesse must take up some considerable time And at this time the Church shall be separated crosses shall cease the wicked shal not persecute c. Then it follows that the major is not absolutely true That all the time the Church is on earth it shal be subject to the four aforesaid particulars Now we have often and justly said The day of judgement begins at the thousand yeers § 3 To the minor wee say that it is false to say This Doctrine of the thousand yeers doth alter the nature of the Church Nature imports substance kinde essence But Mr. Baily knows the rule Magis minus non variant speciem i. e. More and lesse do not alâ—er the kinde And sure Mr. B. hath preached that common true Divinity that heaven doth perfect our condition our knowledge graces soules bodies and communion with God not alter them in kind nature or essence And so the
And accordingly John shews it us Chapt. 11. Chapt. 12 Chapt. 13 Chap. 19. Chap. 20. Lastly Mr. Baily confutes himselfe as hee propounds his argument For hee saith our Doctrine makes the day openâ— when we say The day shall be either one thousand six hundred and fifty or one thousand six hundred ninety five Surely this is not to make the day so certaine or the yeer For saith the Philosopher qui indefinite c. He that answers indefinitely answers nothing Beside we cannot for our lives count so exactly but we may misse at least one yeer if we did absolutely pitch on any one account that were never so right in the footing For my part I shall affirme what is most probable about the account when I come to the seventh and last Book SECT VII Mr. Bailyes seventh Argument THe reward of the Martyrs is everlasting life in the heavens promised to them at Christs comming to judge the just and unjust therefore it is not temporall in an earthly Kingdome of a thousand yeers The Antecedent is proved Matth. 5.10 2 Tim. 4.6 2 Thess 1.6 7 8 9 10. which without doubt is not before the last judgement else the Martyrs would be in a worse case then the soules of other Saints continuing in heaven injoying the Trinity yea a punishment to them being brought downe to the earth to returnâ— to a body not like to the glorious body of Christ nor yet unto these incorruptible immortall spirituall bodies which yet are promised to the least of the faithfull at their resurrection 1 Cor. 15. But unto such a body that eats drinks sleeps fights delights in fleshly pleasures and converseth with beasts and earthly creatures in such a Paradise whereof the Turkish Alcoran and the Jewish Talmud doth speak much But to a godly soule is very tastelesse and to a soul that hath been in heaven exceeding burthensome Answ first We deny the consequence of the Argument For Gods rewarding his people on earth doth not anticipate heaven nor the reward in heaven cut off the rewards on earth See Mat. 19.29 shall receive an hundred fold and shall also inherit eternall life And this in 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 in the New Creation as the word signifies And when they sit on Thrones according to Dan. 7.22 which is according to our Text of Rev. 20.4 Secondly we say that those places Mr. B. brings for the proof of his Antecedent doe prove our assertion viz. of an happinesse of the Saints on earth as well as in heaven As that in 1 Tim. 4.6 7 8. For verse 8. it is said At that day and particularly at Christs appearing To understand which see verse 1. And remember our arguing upon those words Shall judge the quicke and the dead at his appearing and his Kingdome Compare Rev. 19. latter end with Rev. 20.3 4. Likewise that which Mr. Baily urgeth out of 2 Thess 1.6 7 8 9.10 plainly proves a reward on earth as well as in heaven It is a RIGHTEOUS thing c. It is mercy to the Saints but righteousnesse chiefly appears upon the wicked that are punished And this appears more to all the world being done on earth To you that are troubled REST WITH US The Apostle aims at a Rest first on earth compare Heb. 2.5 and Chapter 4. verse 9. Rest when the Lord Jesus shall be revealed from HEAVEN Not in Heaven And the flames of fire are expresse Rev. 17 16. and Chapter 18. verse 8 and 9. and Chapter 19 two last Lastly It is said in that 2 Thess 1.9 They shall be punished from the presence of the Lord and from the glory of his power But Christ hath no power in heaven at the ultimate day of judgement but then layes downe all 1 Cor. 15.24 As for Matth. 5.10 there is no mention of the place but in the word Heaven not expressing which of the three heavens as Paul distinguisheth Now St. John calls the â—â—te of the thousand yeers Heaven Rev. 21.1 And in this place of Matth. 5.10 The adjoyning the word KINGDOME to Heaven clearly imports a state on earth For in heaven above nor Saints nor Christ have any Kingdome at the ultimate day of judgement Yee see now how truely Mr. B. saith without doubt the reward in these places is not till the last day of judgement As for M. B. words The Martyrs would be in worse case c. They are grounded on a mistake For all the Saints both the deceased and living shall then share in the same glory on earth For those words It would bee a punishment c. These all flow from ignorance of what the Scripture hath said in this point viz. that their bodies shall in the thousand yeers bee immortall and glorious and conformable to Christs body as we have shewed afore For that Mr. Baily concludes of fighting in the thousand yeers c. let him affirm it when he can without contradicting himself he affirming it a time of all corporall pleasures and when we affirme it And for Turkish Alcoran and Jewish Talmud we have nothing to do with any thing but what we are convinced is according to Scripture But it is the Scottish manner to dispute by branding with reproaches But sure their contrary opinion tends to Familisme SECT VIII Mr. Baylies eighth Argument § 1 THe opinion of the Millenaries supposeth the restauration of Jerusalem and of the Jewish Kingdome after their destruction by the Romans But the Scriptures deny this Ezek. 16.53.55 When I shall bring againe the captivity of Sodome and of Samaria and her daughters then will I bring again the captivity of thy Captives c. The Jews saith Mr. Baily are never to be restored to their ancient outward estate much lesse to a greater and more glorious Kingdome Jerusalem was to be re-builded and the spirituall glory of the second Temple was to be greater then the first And in the end of the same Chapter the restitution of the Jews after the Babylonish Captivity by vertue of the New Covenant is promised But the outward estate of that people was never to be restored to its ancient lustre more then Samaria or Sodome As Amos speakes of Samaria Chap. 5. 2. The Virgin of Israel is fallen and shall no more rise And Isa saith of Jerusalem The transgression thereof shall be heavy and it shall fall and not rise againe According to the prophesie of Jacob Gen. 49.10 The Scepter shall not depart from Judah till Shiloh come Importing saith Mr. Baily that the Tribe of Judah should ever have some outward visible rule till the comming of Christ in the flesh but thereafter the Scepter and Power of the Church shall be onely spirituall in the hand of Shiloh the Messias He was the substance and body of all these types the restauration of Jerusalem and the erecting of the Monarchy in Judah § 2 Answ The Scripture doth not deny the restauration of Jerusalem but affirme it and that most strongly as we have shewed in many
the glorious representations They shall have the word for inspection Rev. 22.14.19 and admiration to see all revealed and all fulfilled They shall be taught of God to know the full minde of that word and they themselves shall see with their eyes that fulfilled which out of the word they heard with their ears So that their Joshua sc Jesus shall say to them according to their experience Nothing hath failed of all that God hath spoken They shall have the effect of sublime purity and glory of Discipline sc Angelical order Rev. 21.12 sc 4. Gates and three Angels at every gate So that verse 25. Though the gate be never shut yet verse 27. no unclean thing shall enter in which is the cream and quintessence of the effect of all Discipline In summe As then the labour of the body in moving shall be more excellent a labour-lesse labour a pain-lesse labour a pleasant labour so the worship of the minde shall be without irksomenesse So full of grace that all actings of grace shall be heavenised into all sweetnesse SECT V. The fifth Priviledge Union of Saints throughout the world UNion of heads and union of hearts sc unity in judgement and unity in affection Zach. 14.9 The Lord shall be King over all the earth In that day there shall be one Lord and his name one Is hee not King now Yea but not so actually visibly and absolutely before the eyes of all many great wicked ones yet domineering as he shall be then Is not his name now one yes in it selfe he is the God of truth But by mens pretences that he favours this way and that way men intimate of him several names as Papist Lutheran Calvinist Episcopal Presbyterian Independent But then it shall be cleer which is the onely way of truth And so God shall have one name because as Zeph. 3.9 They shall serve the Lord with onenesse of consent all being of a pure language So that their judgements being one and consequently their practises one great will be the onenesse of affections as Isa 11.13 The envy of Ephraim shall depart Ephraim shall not envy Judah nor Judah vexe Ephraim If so great was the union of Saints in the first fruits Act. 4.32 how much more when the whole lump is fully perfected surely their union shall be as that in Paradise before Adam fell The history of dissention now is grievous to Saints therefore on the contrary how sweet will the mystery bee in the injoyment of Union SECT VI. The sixth Priviledge Honour shall be given to all holy things sc to Religion and religious men § 1 GOd hath in several passages you heard afore promised to take away the reproach of his people as in other things so in Religion This is Gilgal the Great to rowle away the reproach from Israel In the day when the Jewes shall be converted ten shall take hold of one Jew Zach. 8.23 therefore it is said divers times in the Revelation sc Rev. 14.1 Rev. 22.4 The Saints shall have the name of their Father in their foreheads They shall be no more ashamed of their Religion then of their faces Though the Church kisse Christ sc dearly imbrace him yet shall she not be despised Cant. 8.1 Hebrew I will finde thee in the streets I will kisse thee and also they shall not contemne me Publick profession and imbracing of Christ shal not be despised as 't is spoken in the very same Chap. of Canticles where is handled the call of the Jewes So Isa 49.23 Kings shall bee thy Nurses Rev. 21. Kings shall bring their honour to the Church Isa 60.13 The glory of Lebanon c. shall come to beautifie my Sanctuary and I will make the place of my feet glorious Christ the head the Church the feet And there Christ walks Rev. 1. And that Christ will make glorious afore all though formerly men trampled Yea Zach. 9.16 The Church shall be as the stones of a crown lifted up Not as stones in the street but of a Crowne Not of a Crowne falling but of a Crowne lifted up Zach. 12.5 The Governours of Judah shall say in their hearts the inhabitants of Jerusalem my strength in the Lord of Hosts We know that of late dayes governours have put all the reproachfull names upon the Saints and Churches of the purest judgement and profession as Faction Schisme Puritans c. But the time is at hand they shall be convinced and shall know that Saints are the best men the interest and stay of Kingdomes § 2 Let the consideration of these Priviledges make us walk like them that shall see these times let the dawning be upon us now the Sun is about to rise cleaving to Christ in Ordinances and to one another in love honouring them most that have most holinesse Yea let this comfort us that all the glorious Promises and Prophesies shall then be fulfilled Finis Libri Sexti THE SEVENTH BOOK Containing an Essaie Touching the time when this future Glorious state of the Church on Earth for a Thousand Yeers probably shall begin CHAP. I. The Introduction unfolding and cutting out the Worke for this BOOK § 1 I Know Lubrious est hic locus this is a point wherein my Pen may soon slip and as soon will sleight-spirited 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 carp and over-austere Cato censure As for the extremous multitude whose Motto or Character is Hosanna to day and Crucifie to morrow they will deifie if a man hit right but infinitly vilifie if he mistake But the ingenuous prudent will neither reckon me a God for the first nor cypher mee into lesse then a man for the second The best of men in such a labyrinth and lesse have mistaken Upon this ground I take my trip Christo duce the Lord being my Leader § 2 And the better to stave off some blows I shall take into me the guard of other learned pious mens judgements and present the Reader with variety of accounts with their grounds and thence let him not I Prophesie if any will so call it § 3 The worke we have to doe in relation to this is ## ¶ 1 To give the Reader severall Prognosticks shewing indefinitly that this glorious state of things is not far off ¶ 2 To cast up the severall Computations found in the Scriptures pointing at a determinate time when most probably this state shall begin CHAP. II. HOlding forth the several Prognosticks that the Glorious time we speake of is not far off but now approacheth especially in the introduction thereunto viz. The Call of the Jews SECT I. The first Prognostick The expiration of Accounts § 1 IN the first place severall numbers of yeers Prophesied to fore-run the Commencement of this state are now almost expired I shall now but touch and but some of them intending by Gods assistance to give you as I am enabled a more exact account in the third Chapter ¶ 1 The One thousand two hundred and ninety dayes that is yeers foretold Dan.
highten the spirituality of the Scripture giving a distinct and joynt accomplishment to letter and Spirit each in other the Letter in this state having its fulnesse in the Spirit and the fulnesse of the Spirit taking in the letter Those three principal points are these I The Testimony and entrance to Christs Kingdome shall be the indubitable evidence of our Lords appearance in his owne person whether this appearance shall be miraculous the Lord descending to vaile for a season his glorified body which being ten thousand times brighter then the Sunne cannot be seen by mortal eyes under a meaner form that it may be fitted to our natural senses or whether this appearance shall be mysterious the Lord in the same instant of his appearance transfiguring the dead and living Saints into a conformity to his glorified body that in the same twinkling of an eye they may see their King and he may see them in beauty eye to eye their glorified eye to his glorified eye or whether both these according to those several Scriptures Mat. 24.30 Act. 1.11 1 Cor. 15.51 Ph. 3.20 21. for these several ends of conviction to the world conversion to the Jews glorification to the Saints renovation to the creature The 2. principal point in this Book is That the state of the Saints Kingdom shal be the resurrection from the dead and a change in the living Saints equivalent to the resurrection of the bodies of those that sleep in the dust Thus each particular Saint and the whole Church being predestinated to be conformed to the likenesse of the image of Christ shall in this state answer that state of Christ in his owne particular person between his resurrection and ascension which seems to have been his Paradisical state his soul entring into Paradise at his death his body at his resurrection re-assumed into the same state with the soule The last head is That there shall be a New Earth to be theâ—seat of this New Kingdome If the Earth be made New with the Newnesse of the Spirit if that also be spiritulized then will it be fit for glorified Inhabitants The streets of the New Jerusalem are said to be as gold and glasse Behold the nature of the New Earth and the description of its spirituality It shall be as pure gold for its solid simple substance for its shining glory It shall be as pure glasse for its transparency cleernesse and through-lightsomnesse Octob. 19. 1653. PETER STERRY In pursuance of an Order bearing date the 6. instant for my perusal of this Treatise penn'd by Dr. Homes and to report my opinion concerning the same I certifie as followeth THat all the Saints shall reigne with Christ a Thousand yeers on earth in a wonderfull both visible and spiritual glorious manner before the time of the ultimate and general Resurrection is a Position which though not a few have besit ated about and some opposed yet have gained ground in the hearts and judgements of very many both grave and godly men who have left us divers Essayes and Discourses upon this Subject And having perused the learned and laborious travels of this Author I conceive that the Church of God hath not hitherto seen this great point so clearly stated so largely discussed so strongly confirmed not onely by the testimony of Ancient and Modern Writers of all sorts but by the holy Scriptures throughout as it is presented in this Book Wherein also divers other considerable points are collaterally handled all tending to set forth the Catastrophe and result of all the troubles and hopes of such as feare God as the preface to their eternal blisse And whereas some have been and still are apt to abuse this Doctrine by making it an occasion to the flesh and of beating themselves in the expectation of a carnall liberty and worldly glory I finde that this Author hath cautiously fore-laid and prevented all such abuses by shewing the exceeding spiritualnesse and holinesse of this state To which as none but the truly holy shall attain so having attained it they shall walke in the hight of holinesse And therefore I judge this Book very usefull for the Saints and worthy of the publick view Octob. 13. 1653. Joseph Caryll THE DAWNING OF THE DAY-STAR Largely discussed in Five Bookes THE DAWNING OF THE DAY-STAR QUOTATIONUM quaedam SPECIMINA nec non Epitome totius primilibri compendiaria pro extraneis praesertim Judaeis Latine reddita I. BOOKE Of the Generall and maine Position LIBER I. De generali summariâ Thesi CHAP. I. The Position propounded THe most Sacred Scriptures do frequently in many places affirm that All the Saints shall reigne with Christ a long time namely a THOUSAND yeares on EARTH SATAN the meane while being bound which yeares are not yet begun but do ere long and from thence are at length to be fulfilled in a wonderful both VISIBLE and SPIRITUAL glorious manner at the RESTITUTION of ALL THINGS and their NEW-CREATION before the time of ultimate and generall Resurrection SAnctos omnes diutinè cum CHRISTO regnaturos in TERRA scilicet MILLE annos SATANA tunc temporis ligato nondum incaeptos brevi incaepturos indeque implendos tam visibili quam spirituali mirandâ 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 gloriâ ante resurrectionis ultimae generalis Epocham a Sacrosanctissimis Scripturis passim asseritur SECTION I. The Position expounded § 1 BY Saints I meane all the Elect from time to time extant afore that time effectually called whose characters that we may know them in relation to our Position are in the Revelation limbed to the life where both it and they are deciphered in one the same table or frame viz. Rev. 20.4 And I saw Thrones and they sate upon them and judgement was given to them and I saw the souls of them that were beheaded for the witnesse of Jesus and for the Word of God and which had not worshipped the Beast neither his Image neither had received his marke upon their foreheads or in their hands and they lived and reigned with Christ a thousand years § 2 In which words I minde at this time chiefly the three characters of them that shall reigne with Christ The first is Beheading synechdochically signifying all persecution either more particularly as it is here expressed for the Witnesse of Jesus that is for asserting the God-head as wel as the Man-hood of Christ for which many Martyrs suffered in the Arian persecution soon after Constantines time or more generally for the Word of God viz. the fundamental doctrines thereof for which they suffered afore the Arian persecution in the heathen-Roman tenfold persecution and after in the Antichristian-Roman persecution and of late times in severall Countries in the Arminian and Socinian persecution or for both § 3 The second Character is not worshipping the Beast no nor his Image Those that shall reigne with Christ reverence not either apparent grosse Idolatry or specious refined under the
gravi captivitate seu dispersione perstant servantur sua quantum possunt retinent in divinis libris exercent sese licet prave omnia intelligunt Profectò nulli antiqui Trojani Longobardi Hunni aut Vandali sic sua retinuerunt ut à cunctis populis civili victu religione sejungerentur suam originem atque historiam certis consignatam literis ostenderent atque sic ubique dispersi à suis institutis non discederent Quod cùm in Judaeis accidat est porrò Dei opus singulare atque nobis non vulgariter commodat Sunt enim testes nostrorum librorum eosque ut suos authenticos circumferunt quod Augustinus annotavit Nisi enim is populus extaret conficta esse à nobis Ethnict Philosophi possent suspicari quae de orbe condito de Adamo de Noha de Abrahamo Patriarchis Regibus Prophetis credimus praedicamus Servantur itaque perpetuò hoc tempore à Deo indubitatò ad aliquam futuram salutem § 2 Next to Peter Martyr wee alleadge Pareus who also is much for a generall and glorious call of the Jewes yet to come which is a maine part of the glorious future times wee treat of Yea their general Call is the interest of the Saints now extant that such a splendent time shall bee as the Prophets both of the Old and New Testament abundantly hint unto us of which more after For which time in the quotation adjoyned here out of Pareus wee have not onely his judgement and solid reasons but the judgements and reasons of the learned godly ancient Fathers presented to us or us directed to them Doctus David Paraeus Ad 11. Cap. ad Rom. Dub. 18. ita suam fert sententiam Dub. Utrum locus ille Apostoli probet SUB FINEM MUNDI maximâ Copiâ Judaeos ad Christum convertendos Resp Tametsi in utramque partem sint eruditorum probabiles rationes affirmans tamen sententia potiùs retinenda videtur 1. Quia desertè sic sonat Apostoli oraculum Post quam plenitudo gentium introierit totum Israelem servatum iri Totus verò Israel est tota gens Israelitica Tota igitur convertetur ad Christum extra quem nulla est salus Nec totus Israel hìc signficare potest allegoricè totam Ecclesiam ex solis gen tibus collectam cui aliqui fortè Judaei sese adjungent sic enim Apostolus non revelasset mysterium siquidem quotide manifestum erat gentes maximo numero aliquos etiam Judaeos ad fidem converti Nec loqui Apostolum de spirituali sed de carnali Israele ex v. 12. 14. evincitur 2. Manifestum est Apostolum voluisse Judaeos peculiari encomio ornare consolatione erigere At nisi credatur praedicere Israelitarum plenam conversionem nihil ad scopum dixisset 3. Vaticinia Prophetica v. 26 27. allegata non desigularibus quibusdam Judaeis sed de ipsâ populi multitudine loquuntur Origines his addit ex Hos Cap. 2. Israel quaeret salutem in stigatus dicens apud semetipsum illud Propheticum revertar ad virum meum priorem quia melius mihi erat ante quà m modò 4. Etiam Johanni Apoc. Cap. 7. Videtur revelata fuisse sub extremis temporibus futura Israelis plena conversio quando quatuor Angeli prohibentur nocere terrae mari donec obsignentur 144000. servorum Dei in frontibus suis ex omnibus tribubus filiorum Israelis ex TRIBU Judae 12000. ex reliquis TRIBUBUS singulis totidem Quod Oâ—aculum ad literam de CONVERSIONE JUDAEORUM planè intelligendum videtur quoniam Israelitae signati in frontibus ibi discernuntur disertè a signatis gentibus populis linguis reliquis vers 9. 5. Adde quod ex populis antiquissimis soli Judaei in tam variis casibus Captivitate dispersione perstant servantur adhuc Civili victu religione ab omnibus separati inde ab orbe condito originem historiam suam conservantes Id haud dubiè admittendum singulare est opus Dei quod indubitatò arguit hunc populum ad aliquam futuram salutem conservari 6. Denique patres complures in hanc sententâ—am inclinant quòd ingressâ Gentium plenitudine etiam Judaei sint reversuri ad Christum Origines sic Si pro eo ut introiret gentium plenitudo caecitas facta est in Israel pro omnibus quae fecerunt sine dubio cum ingressa fuerit gentium plenitudo caecitas cessabit Videatur etiam Chrysostomus Homil. 12. de verbo Dom. in Marc. Tom. 2. cum agit de ficu verbo domini arefactâ Hilar. lib. 11. de Trin. sup Psal 58. 60. Augustinus qu. 148. super Genesin utramque sententiam refert Item Ambrosius Hieronymus in hunc locum Dionysius Carth. Totus Israel i.e. Totus populus Judaeorum salvus fiet credendo in Christum Israelitae abducti inquit Pareus in Assyriam Captivitatem dispersi sunt atque permixti gentibis toto terrarum orbe nec unquam sunt recollecti in populum Dei sed mansit dispersio etiam temporibus Christi Apostolorum hucusque ut ex Epistolis Jacobi Petri Constat Haec Pareus § 3 Lorinus a Jesuite in his COMMENTARY on Act. 1.6 quotes divers learned and godly Ancients as Justin Martyr Ireneus Cyprian Hierom Chrysostome Theophilus Alexandrinus Austin and Bede that understand this question of the Apostles in this Act. 1.6 Of restoring the Kingdome to Israel of a temporal Kingdome And because saith Lorinus I see all these of that minde it may be saith hee understood of such a Kingdome However saith he this errour in the Disciples yet ignorant being ranke among the carnall Jewes might bee tolerated But the errour shall I say or Heresie of the Chiliasts or Millenaries is lesse to § c. bee borne seeing Damasus the Pope condemned Apollinaris upon this consideration or by this very name Observe Reader the wise reason Lorinus gives of condemning the opinion what ever the particulars of it were namely because the Pope condemned it A reason to a grounded Protestant to suspect that the opinion in whole was unjustly condemned according to that Proverb It is good Religion that bad Nero persecutes before which Apollinaris besides heretical Cerinthus saith Lorinus Papias Irenaeus Justin Martyr Tertullian Nepâ—s Lactantius Sulpitius and others I suppose lesse pertinaciously were of this opinion To which also Austine did once incline And of others there is mention § d. by Eusebius Hierom and our Ribera expounding the 20 Chapter of the Revelat. From which chiefly the said Fathers are to be thought to take hint of their opinion besides the testimonies of the Old Testament c. And perhaps both the later Fathers and especially the Disciples of Christ did interpret the Petition of the Lords Prayer Thy Kingdome come and that place in Matth. 26.29 Now Reader thou hearest Lorinus make a good Confession And thou wilt heare more then
great a Testimony as this of JUSTIN MARTYR may be brought concerning any opinion among Christians if you except the maine Articles of our faith And the generall consent of all the ORTHODOX and in the Age next the Apostles is no small argument or prejudice against the contrary opinion or succeeding Ages It seemed the HERETICKS of those times ESPECIALLY or indeed ONELY believed it not and that for some private respect because admitting thereof they must needs also confesse a RESURRECTION OF THE FLESH and that the same God that is mentioned in the LAW and PROPHETS is also the FATHER OF OUR LORD JESUS CHRIST I am sure CERINTHUS that ARCH-HERETICK in those dayes whom after ages doe make the first broacher of this opinion is never taxed for it by them who have diligently noted his HERESIES And perhaps if hee had any sensuall conceit hereal out as it seems hee had hee was beholding to JUDAISME for it and he himself being a JEW it was not taken notice of in him But for a HRISTIAN to have such doting imaginations it would render him more wild-headed Yet no man ought to hee blamed for maintaining a TRUTH in a JEWS company either in THIS MATTER or any else if with heed bee passe by those grosse phantasies which doe blemish the truth More deservedly may wee finde fault with DIONYSIUS and his followers the great impugners of this opinion who when about the end of the third AGE the dispute about it grew very hot to lessen the Authority of the REVELATION by the evident and undeniable proofes whereof the matter in question was asserted a foule impiety they fathered it upon I know not whom yet one of the same name against the manifest witnesse of JUSTIN IRENAEVS and all the FATHERS afore them who inscribe it to JOHN THE BELOVED DISCIPLE OF CHRIST and EVANGELIST Neither can HIEROME himselfe be excused though a very learned man otherwise but easie to bee deceived who with the same DIONYSIVS doth upon an uncertaine report falsely affixe to the opinion of them who according to truth believed the THOVSAND YEERS happinesse on Earth the INJVRY OF CIRCVMCISION THE BLOOD OF SACRIFICES c. which old peeces of JUDAISME or perhaps the dreames of some HERETICKES being gathered out of a study of contention and ill will were patcht to this opinion of the PRIMITIVE CHURCH But IF hee CERTAINLY knew that the FIRST CHRISTIANS and holy MARTYRS did expect Circumcision and Sacrifices in the Kingdome of Christ how is he to be blamed that condemned them not for it but left every man to the freedome of his owne judgement either to approve or dislike thereof as Hierom expresseth himselfe openly § d. But what countenance soever this opinion hath or shall finde in this age let me tell the Reader this one thing that seeing there are so manifest prooâ—es of a GLORIOUS KINGDOME OF THE SAINTS ON EARTH out of the Old Testament there will be not better or readier way to deale with the Jewes in matter of their conversion then not to wrest the plaâ—ne Prophesies of a SECOND GLORIOUS APPEARANCE OF CHRIST to his FIRST COMING but rather to perswade them that they must expect no other MESSIAS who should fulfill all these promises expecting what is to be expected besides that JESUS OF NAZARETH whom their Ancestors crucified And this way is every where almost insisted upon throughout the whole REVELATION For whiles wee force those most cleare Prophesies concerning things promised in the SECOND COMING to his FIRST COMING the JEWES scorne and deride us and are more and more confirmed in their infidelity But for the course which I have here set downe I am much mistaken if it be not the same which was observed among them by PETER himselfe Act. 3 19 20 21. REPENT YEE THEREFORE and BE CONVERTED THAT YOUR SINNES MAY BEE BLOTTED OUT WHEN THE TIME OF REFRESHING SHALL COME FROM THE PRESENCE OF THE LORD AND HE SHALL SEND JESUS CHRIST WHICH BEFORE WAS PREACHED TO YOU WHOM THE HEAVENS MUST RECEIVE UNTILL THE TIMES OF RESTITUTION OF ALL THINGS WHICH GOD HATH SPOKEN BY THE MOUTH OF ALL HIS HOLY PROPHETS SINCE THE WORLD BEGAN § e. But I forget my selfe For indeed I thinke it more fit to publish what might bee piously believed concerning this TENENT rather in another mans sense and expressions then in mine owne being more willing to learne then obtrude mine own weaknesses To this end I have also collected Hee meanes in his Notes on his translation of ALSTED put in the Margin as I suppose What some of the most eminent DIVINES of the Church of ENGLAND Dr. HAKEWELL Dr. TWISSE Mr. MEDE c. that thou mightest not thinke it onely an Out-landish toy or phantasie of yesterday much lesse a savouring of POPERY have thought and published concerning this opinion Besides the irrefragable judgement of divine TYCHO BRAHE and with him the determination of CAROLUS GALLUS omitted by ALSTED and not long since one of the STATES PROFESSORS OF DIVINITY in the University of LEYDEN § 4. DIATRIBE de MILLE ANNIS APOCALYPTICIS non illis CHILIASTARUM PHANTASTARUM sed BB Danielis Johannis per JOHANNEM HENRICUM ALSTEDIUM Francofurti 1627. § a. Hunc Tractatum fidelissimè W. BURTON cum doct is suis Annotationibus in margine juxià positis in nostram linguam vernaculam transtulit § b. Is in priori suâ Epistolâ translationi praefixâ cùm AUTHORI tum OPERI tùm etiam SUBJECTO hoc encomiasticum per hibet testimonium AUTHOR eruditione aequalis censetur aestimationis cuilibet Scriptorum recentium transmarinorum mult is abbinc annis transactis OPUS est exegesis vigesimi Capitis Apocalypsis SUBJECIUM ejus est splendentis regni in terrâ Christi assertio res maximi proculdubio solaminis Ecclesiae Dei consolationis Non me latet Apocalypticos plerumque discursus multis obtrectationibus esse expositos ipsamque hanc Prophetiam etiamnum librum fuisse obsignatum Quum verò ego ipse multum ex hâc illius exegese satisfactionis recepissem statui apud me item Dei populum ex eâdem aliquid fructus posse emetere Quod sanè praecipuum fuit in causâ me illam omnium publicam fecisse In EPISTOLA ejus secundâ eidem praepositâ in hunc modum opinionis nostrae HISTORICE rationem reddit Quam brevibus sic accipite Liceat mihi bone lector tibi narrare perpetuam fuisse opinionem seculi Apostolis proximi RESURRECTIONEM fore ante ILLAM Die ultimo generalem beatamque fidelium conditionem in TERRA MILLE ANNOS Hoc nos edocebunt Tertullianus contra Marcion Irenaeus contra Haeres nec non Justinus Martyr in Dialog cum Tryph. Jud. ut prolixius è Justino nos anteà citavimus Quibus Justini verbis hanc suam addit sententiam Nescio inquit an tantum ut hoc JUSTINI testimonium pro aliquâ Christianorum opinione exceptis fundamentalibus fidei articulis afferri possit Generalis autem ORTHODOXORUM consensus
Prophet is to point out that Dominion and that Glory c. which the other foure Monarchs had And ALL PEOPLES and NATIONS and LANGUAGES should SERVE him whose dominion is for ever c. that is as long as the world below lasts all which manifestly relate to a Kingdome of Christ on earth compare v. 23 and v. 27. Thus far the Kingdome is given to Christ as if in comparison hee had none afore The vers 17. c. it is said to be the Saints Kingdome in these words These great Beasts which are foure are foure Kings that is foure Emperial Monarchies under foure races of mighty persecuting Monarchical Emperours of foure several sorts namely First Assyrio-Chaldean Secondly Medo-Persian Thirdly Grecian Fourthly Roman which shall arise out of the EARTH that is by violence succeed one another in that inheritance of the world But the Saints of the most High shall take the Kingdome that is that very Kingdome of the world that the other foure former Monarchs had and possesse the Kingdome for ever and for ever and ever that is in all ages as long as time shall bee as the original signifies adding v. 23. c. to the end of the Chapter The fourth Beast shall bee the fourth Kingdome upon earth that is the Emperour of the Roman Empire which shall bee divers from al the Kingdomes namely in Rule in Conquest and Cruelty and shall devoure the whole earth and shall tread it down and breake it in peeces meaning that the Romans shall conquer the whole world utterly defacing all Kingly dominion in the same And the ten Hornes out of this Kingdome are ten Kings that shall arise to wit the Roman Empire at last is divided into ten Kingdomes as John hath it severall times in the Revelation as a tendency to the ruine of that Empire for it follows here And another shall rise after them and he shall bee divers from the first and he shall subdue three Kings That is the Easterne Saracen-Arabian Turkish power ascending to a monstrous height of strength differing from the former in Nation Religion and Tyranny shall take away three of the said tenne Kingdomes And he shall speake great words against the most High see the Turkish Alcoran and shall weare out the Saints of the most High that is in a great measure slaying so many Christians at one battel as the tippes of their right eares filled nine sackes and thinke to change Times and Lawes that is those of divine institution as appeares also in his Alcoran and they shall bee given into his hand untill a time and times and dividing of times meaning that the Saint◠shall by divine permission fall under the Turkish power three hundred and fifty yeers from his first invading the Jewish Countries to his full and finall fall But saith the 26. v. c. to the end of the Chapter The judgement shall sit and they shall take away his dominion to consume and to destroy it to the end that is to say The Ancient of dayes as fitting in judgement judgeth to vindicate the Saints and so gives them opportunity and virility to deprive the Turke of his Kingdome and utterly to consume his power and strength And so in the 27. verse The Kingdome and Dominion UNDER the whole HEAVEN shall bee given to the people of the Saints of the most High c. That is the same Dominions of the whole world below that the former tyrannicall Monarches usurped shall now be given into the hands of the converted Jewes and holy Gentiles adhering to them to reigne on earth with Christ to whom these Dominions were delivered in the former part of this Chapter This place of the seventh of Daniel hath beene so large touching the Saints reigning with Christ on earth that we shall adde but one or two places more and that very briefly Revel 11.15 c. The seventh Angel sounded and there were great voices in heaven saying the Kingdomes of the WORLD are become the Kingdomes of our LORD and of his CHRIST or of him as CHRIST and hee shall REIGNE for ever and ever that is throughout all AGES from hence forward over the Kingdomes of the WORLD as if hitherto he had not in comparison reigned over them And the foure and twenty Elders c. fell upon their faces c. Saying we give thee thanks O Lord c. because thou hast TAKEN TO THEE THY GREAT POWER and hast REIGNED and the Nations were ANGRY which shewes this was not at the ultimate day of judgement and the time of the dead that they should bee judged is come that is the Saints should bee vindicated for so it presently followes that thou shouldest give rewards to thy servants the Prophets and to the Saints and them that feare thy name which what should it bee but to reigne on earth as it is both before expressed in the Preface Rev. 5.10 and after in the Catastrophe Revel 20.4 in regard of which reigning on earth they may bee said to bee the FIRST-FRUITS to God Rev. 14.4 because this is but the beginning of Gods worke of glorifying his Saints Let us close this Paragraph with Heb. 2.5 c. to 10. The world to come the Greek is the INHABITED world to come must be put under man though not under Angels according to Psalme 8. quoted there by the Apostle which Psalme relates to Gen. 1.26 where God gives Adam dominion over all the Creation But saith the Apostle in his time Wee see not yet all things put under him onely Jesus as the pledge is crowned with glory Therefore say I there is such a thing yet to come Let not the Reader if I may intreat so much despise the allegation of these Texts for the present purpose which are little more then barely alleadged onely to hint the Saints reigning with Christ on earth I desire to ingage him upon this request but for a time till I come to critically scan if I may assume so much confidence to my selfe these and many other places of Scripture And then upon his serious joynt view of all all together if he can bee of another minde different from mee let him for mee abound in his owne sense § 4 But to wheele about from this digression to our owne post and businesse in hand viz. the Reigning of the Saints WITH CHRIST at this time and in this place aforesaid Before they reigned but sometimes over their corruptions and Satans temptations but never over men but now totally and finally over Sinne MEN and Divels as wee shall demonstrate afterwards Their living must be after a RESURRECTION as the word is twice mentioned in this 20. of Revelation Though they bee made but spiritual Kings and Priests as the Objecters will have it in those words Rev. 5.10 Hee hath made us Kings and Priests to God yet how shall the next words be figured off from their proper sense where the Crowne of Dignity is put upon the head of REIGNING UPON EARTH Hee
hath been said upon this Text of 2 Thess 2. with obtruding a sense upon it and devolving it upon the ultimate day of judgement as if then were the just time of Christs destroying Antichrist by the brightnesse or appearance of his coming For first this were to overturne the whole tenor of Scripture that tells us distinctly Rev. 17.16 of the means of the overthrow of Antichrist viz. That the ten Hornes or ten powerfull Dominions Regalities or Imperialities shall hate the whore and shall make her desolate and naked and shall eat her flesh that is devoure or destroy by an Hebraisme imitating the Hebrew 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and her flesh and not only her spirituall or moral estate and burn her with fire And the manner and measure and effect Rev. 18. Rev. 19. 19 20 21. viz. A milstone cast into the sea the cessation of all musicke mils and trades the extinguishing of all candles are there used as types and signes of his destruction and the wailing of Kings and Merchants for his desolation are used to set forth the sequel thereof And then it is added expressely that the Beasts and the Kings of the earth and their Armies are gathered together to make war against him that sate on the horse and against his Army and the Beast was taken and with him the false Prophet and were cast into a lake of fire c. and the remnant were slaine with the sword c. and all the soules were filled with their flesh All which things shall finde neither time nor place to be acted at the ultimate day of judgement 2 There is a weighty consideration in this Text of 2 Thess 2. to evince that it cannot relate to the ultimate day of judgement For then is the destruction of all the wicked of the world Rev. 22.10 If any of Antichrist precisely understood as the brood of Turk and Pope be then extant they are swallowed up and drowned as to the enumeration among the crowd of Hypocrites who shall then be judged condemned and executed as hypocrites as oft the day of judgement is so described Matth. 7.22 Mat. 25.41 Mat. 24.51 But our Apostle in this 2 Thess 2.8 speaks precisely of the distinct destruction of Antichrist as Antichrist And therefore mentions him and his brood in a singular phrase as a single man In vers 3. he is called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The man of sin And in the same verse 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The sonne of perdition vers 4. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. That opposer vers 8. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 That same lawlesse one For if I may have leave to speake my notion then in precise consideration wee may thus distinguish That as lapsed Adam with all wicked men consired in him Rom. 5. is called the one and onely first man 1 Cor. 15. And Christ the second Adam with all true Christians reckoned in him Rom. 6. is called the one and onely last man 1 Cor. 15. So Antichrist is one middle person partly a Man and partly a Beast as it is oft in the Revelation in whom all Antichristian men that are neither openly wicked without all shew of Religion nor yet sincerely Christians are to be reckoned as one with him as limbs and Trunck make but one body one Antichrist So that as Antichrist is a distinct thing in precise notion from the dirty open wicked so his destruction is distinct afore the ultimate day of judgement For Rev. 11. 13 15 18. Antichrist is destroyed WHILES Christ hath a Kingdome distinct from the Fathers ultimate Kingdome And WHEN the Nations were angry at Antichrists beginning to fall And Rev. ch 18. and c. 19. he falls afore New Jerusalem is set up in Rev. 21. And in c. 20. it is set forth as the cause of both that Christ reignes at least in and by his Saints on earth a thousand yeers So that the appearance of Christ destroying Antichrist is at the beginning of the thousand yeers For Christ appeares as well at the beginning as the ending of the thousand yeeres At the beginning for two maine ends the one for the conversion of the Jewes Zech. 12. Rev. 1.7 the other for the destruction of Antichrist as we have it in this 2 Thess 2.8 which though it doth not hold forth the last and ultimate generall judgement yet it holds forth a day of judgement yea the beginning and preparation to that day of judgement setting his sheep as Matth. 25. on his right hand first speaking comfortably to them for a thousand yeeres to make them triumph on earth where they have been trampled on and after at the end of that thousand yeeres sets the goats on his left hand condemning them at that time of the ultimate day of judgement SECT V. Of the fifth Scripture for Christs personall appearance at the great Restauration of the Church Matth. 26.29 But I say unto you I will not drinke henceforth of this fruit of the vine untill that day when I drinke it new with you in my Fathers Kingdome § 1 THis Scripture is alleadged by Mr. Burroughs for one place to prove the appearance of Christ personally at the thousand yeeres It is true saith he this place is usually interpreted in a mysticall sense But there is no reason why wee may not take it in a literall And a little afore hee said It is a good rule that all Scriptures are to be understood literally unlesse it make against the coherence of the Text or against some other Scriptures § 2 It may be some may thinke that commonly this place is understood of Christs conversing with the Disciples after his Resurrection But not so commonly for the most renowned Calvin Marlorat Grotius c. are against that § 3 Besides it is not said Luke 24.42 43. that he did drinke with the Disciples after his resurrection eate he did with them to shew the verity of his Humanity now risen but it is not said he dranke as if he needed it either for concoction or to allay some corporall passion of heat § 4 It is true that it is said by Peter Act. 10.41 touching himselfe and the rest of the Apostles We did eate and drinke with him after he rose from the dead which may signifie their more familiar society with him as Luk. 13.26 We have eaten and dranke in thy presence but doth not assert Christs drinking It is said expresly We did eate and drinke not that he did drinke Paul tells us 1 Cor. 15. the body is raised a spirituall body And Christ is the first fruites of them that sleep which signifies that after the resurrection of the body there is no need of drinke though Christ did then eate to shew himselfe to be true man and therefore it is generally conceived that this cup Matth. 26.29 was his * Sumpto poculo renunciat Corporali potioni Theophyl En◠rat in Matth. 26.29 last parting cup that hee dranke in this present world as never more
he that shall endure to the END the same shall be saved Of the other signes he said they did not signifie that the END was immediately at hand vers 6. These signs shall be saith Christ BUT the END is not YET But now hee comes to speake of the signe of the End of the world viz. that this Gospel of the KINGDOME shall be preached in all the world 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 published as by an Herauld And THIS Gospel of THE KINGDOME as pointing at this particular of the good newes of the Gospel that Christ should after all these darke clouds of the reigne of wickednesse have a Kingdome on earth And then saith Christ shall the END come which must of necessity import one of these ENDS and one of these wayes must be signified by the publishing of the Gospel in all the world That either the Gospel should be published in all the world to Jews and Gentiles as a signe immediately before the End of THIS present world that is before the thousand yeers of the great Restauration Or that the full and effectuall manifestation of the Gospel should be in the time of that Restauration in those thousand yeers which Paul calls Heb. 2.5 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 That inhabited world that is to come of which place much after as a fore-running signe of the ultimate generall end of the whole world Let the Reader take which he pleaseth For either of them concludes for us that after this signe according as we interpret the sequel shall be the beginning or ending of Christs visible appearance to us on earth As it follows vers 29. Then shall appear the signe of the Sonne of man not for a meer short sentence of judgement but to gather his elect from the foure quarters of the earth Of which place much in Sect. 3. of this 2 Book § 4 To gather all into an apparent argument the summe and signes of all is this If Christ in shewing the signes of his coming the second time doth clearly distinguish between his next coming and visible appearing and the end of the world and for that end gives distinct signes of both then Christ must come before the end of the world and visibly appeare But so doth Christ clearly distinguish and distinctly signifie those two as we have shewed Therefore there is yet a time wherein Christ will come and visibly appeare before the end of the world At first we know by the Gospels he came in a state of humility for salvation to sinners that should believe The next time he comes in glory to reigne visibly to the comfort of them that doe beleeve Rev. 20. first six verses Third and last time for terrour to the wicked vers 12. Of that second coming the thing now under consideration Christ having given signes as hath been shewed he concludes in verse 30. They shall see the Sonne of man in the Clouds of heaven with great power and glory which cannot be meant of the finall sentence of the ultimate judgement because of that in the 34 verse bound with an asseveration and attestation before and behinde Verily I say unto you this generation shall not passe till all these things be fulfilled Heaven and earth shall passe away but my words shall not passe away Of which 34. vers much afterward SECT X. Of the tenth Scripture for Christs visible appearance at the great restauration of the Church Luke 19. ver 11. to 28. He added and spake a Parable because he was nigh to Jerusalem and because they thought that the KINGDOME OF GOD should immediately APPEARE A certaine noble-man went into a farre Country to RECEIVE FOR HIMSELFE A KINGDOME and TO RETURNE and he called his ten Servants and delivered to them ten pounds and said unto them occupy till I come But his Citizens hated him and sent a Message after him saying we will not have this man to reigne over us And it came to passe when he was returned HAVING RECEIVED THE KINGDOME then he commanded these servants to be called unto him to whom he gave the mony c. Then came the first saying Lord thy pound hath gained ten pounds And he said unto him well thou good servant because thou hast been faithfull in a little have thou authority over ten Cities and so proportionable to the rest But those mine enemies that would not have me reigne over them bring them hither and slay them before me § 1 THis Parable was spoken a little before Christs suffering as appeares by the order of the Story here and in Mat. 25. It is pend by Luke who wrote the Acts where he carefully reports Christs coming againe just as they saw him ascend in relation to the restoring of the Kingdome of which Christ spake and the Disciples enquired after Act. 1.3 4 5 6 c. to 12. only saith Luke Acts 3.21 The heavens must receive him for a time and then he shall come from heaven and cause the restitution of all things as hath been opened § 2 The Preface to this Parable is a golden key to open the curious Cabinet of the meaning of this Parable that we may not relye upon a meere Allegory Christ spake this Parable because he was night to Jerusalem and because they thought that the Kingdome of God should IMMEDIATELY APPEARE It doth not deny the appearing of the Kingdom Christ is for it only he is against the immediate 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the suddaine appearance of it he must afore that as is the maine sence of the Parable goe away into a farre country viz. to Heaven and leave talents in trust with his servants giving them time to imploy them and to be so long absent that his enemies grow so bold as to send after him with this high affront they would not have him to reigne over them that is according to the direct sence Some seemingly professours by his long absence should grow quite carelesse of improving the talents or gifts of endowments to his honour and others by his delay as they counted it should become professed enemies against him § 3 But whatever these mistakers dreamed the truth was that as the diligent Talenters expected and accordingly acted Christ went away to Heaven not to returne no more but went thither to take to himselfe a Kingdome which phrase viz. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 must signifie a Kingdome peculiar to himselfe as he is Christ else how doth he take it or receive it to himselfe And being installed into it he is to returne He had his Kingdome of grace before he went away as he oft mentioneth it in his Parables and Sermons adding that that his Kingdome was not of this world And he had the Kingdome of glory as his triumph over his Kingdome of grace having finished his conquest on the Crosse So hee needed not to returne to receive either of these Kingdomes It remains therefore that it is the Kingdome we speak of that he returnes to receive He went to Heaven
conceived by the most learned through the Red Sea So when Israel was to re-edifie the Temple and to settle in their owne land after the captivity Christ appears as a Commander of an Army on horse back with troops behinde him Zech. 1. And as the Sonne of man sitting in judgement as a King Dan. 7. Some will perhaps say these were types of his incarnation If that so in some generall semblance yet these did more distinctly set forth his visible Monarchy to come And therefore his incarnation is made a type or platforme of his coming as a Monarch Act. 1.11 And therefore as the Prologue to his visible appearance againe as a Monarch to reigne as Revel 20. he appeares as a glorious King Rev. 1. with all circumstances to set forth the glory of his Royalty much more therefore in consideration of all that Christ hath said and done in relation to that in the New Testament may we expect him to come and visibly appeare at the setting up of his Monarchy He tells Pilate he was borne to be a King and therefore must be a King But he would not set it up yet afore his ascention Act. 1. Hee must first goe into a far Country and after that receive his Kingdome as wee heard afore out of Luke 19. Chap. 1. Sect. 7. of this second Booke Hee must first ascend up on high and then hee leads Captivity captive spiritually as a Preface to his visible appearance to make the Church spiritually and Corporally glorious which the Apostle immediately hints in that fourth of Ephes Untill wee come to a perfect MAN unto the measure of the stature of the fulnesse of Christ which by and by after that in the same Chapter hee calls THE NEW MAN WHICH AFTER GOD IS CREATED IN RIGHTEOUSNESSE and HOLINESSE As alluding to the state of innocent Adam And therefore as the first Adam did visibly appeare as a glorious Monarch over the visible world so shall the second Adam according to the Prophets and Apostles Doctrine in Psal 8. Hebr. 2. being divine Commentaries on Adams Monarchy Gen. 1. vers 26 27 28. Of which place God assisting you shall heare abundantly in the next BOOK FINIS LIBRI SECVNDI THE THIRD BOOK PROVING That there shall be a most glorious state of the Church and of all things in relation to the Church and that on earth yet before the ultimate day of Judgement CHAP. I. The partition of the ensuing Discourse HAving cleared the visible appearing of Christ personally In the second place we proceed to the proof of his reigning in this visible Kingdome on earth by his mysticall body his members the Saints Wherein we have two things to doe 1 To prove That there is such a Kingdom yet to be on earth as aforesaid in the generall Proposition 2 What that Kingdome will be in the particulars We shall manage the first by foure meanes 1 By Texts of Scripture 2 By Arguments drawne from Scripture 3 By the common consent of all sorts of men as if a law of nature 4 By solution of all the maine objections against it CHAP. II. Containing the Scriptures to prove That there shall be yet on earth before the last Judgement such a Reigning such a visible Kingdome of Christ such a glorious state of the Saints and of all things as is before propounded THE drift scope and sinues of strength of all which places fall into this demonstrative Syllogisme Those things which are prophesied in the word of God and are not yet come to passe must bee fulfilled But the great sensible and visible happinesse of the Church on earth before the ultimate day of judgement is prophesied in the word of God both in the Old and New Testament Therefore it must be fulfilled that such a state be extant upon earth before the ultimate day of judgement The major is granted by all that beleeve the word of God The minor is proved by the ensuing Scriptures SECT I. The twentieth Chapter of the Revelation fully discussed with a demonstration of the true meaning of the one and twentieth Chapter being the exposition of the twentieth § 1 BEfore we take all the choice places of the whole Scriptures in order as they lye in our English Bibles I shall pitch the foot of my Compasse to draw a right and clear circle upon the twentieth Chapter of the Revelation It being the manner and method of the Holy Spirit to declare things especially of this nature gradually as the Church is meet to heare the state thereof requires and the time of fulfilling it drawes neerer and â—o speaks most and plainliest at last Many other instances might be given but that the subject under hand is vast enought of it selfe All these advantages falling to the share of this twentieth Chapter of Revel touching the point in hand as the Catastrophe result and designe of all that God hath spoken before in the Old and New Testament it makes this twentieth of Revel no lesse then a golden key to unlocke the Bible especially the Old Testament that we may look further into other places of Scripture then meerly to make morall observations out of them and mean while doe over-looke the Prophetical intent of God in them § 2 In this twentieth Chapter of the Revel vers 1. it is said AND I saw an Angel come downe c. which AND or as the Translator of the Arab. furthermore or as in sense it oft signifies then imports that John saw immediately afore something in order to this what was that even that which our late invented distinction of Chapters and verses puts in Revel 19. v. 19. I saw saith John the Beast and the Kings of the earth and their Armies gathered together to make warre against him that sate on the horse and against his Army namely against Christ and his members or Saints vers 11 12 13 14. And what was the issue of the War That John goes on to tell us in the twentieth verse of this nineteenth Chapter And the Beast was taken and with him the false Prophet that is the Antichrist either under the notion of humane Imperialty or of Ecclesiasticall Prophesie or Teaching were cast alive into the lake c. And the remnant were slaine with the sword of him that sate upon the horse AND saith John in this twentieth Chap. vers 1. after this I saw an Angel come downe from heaven having the key of the bottomlesse pit and a great chaine in his hand and he laid hold on the Dragon that old Serpent which is the Devill and Satan and bound him a thousand years c. which can meane no other thing but Christ and his Saints conquest over the Beast and the false Prophet and their Armies on earth notwithstanding all the power and policy of their seducing Generalissimo the Devill Here then in all is Christ and his Army and Anti-christ and his Army conflicting and they conflict with the Sword and Antichrists Army is slaine with the sword
brake off three of the ten Dan. 7. v. 20.24 that is about the yeer one thousand * Bucholc Ind. Chron ad an 1009. Periodus Judaica inquit Helvic ad an 950. circiter after Christ the Saracens tooke Hierusalem and have held it to this day And about the yeer after Christ one thousand foure hundred and fifty Mahomet alias Mahumete took Constantinople where Constantinus Palaelogus the last of the Grecian Emperours was utterly overthrown ** Bucholc Ind. Chron. ad an 1453. inde inquit orientis imperium penes Turcas fuit Sic Helvic in Chro. Atque hinc inquit imperium orientis prorsus ad Turcas tranâ—rit So that the Turke plucked up by the roots that is wholly subdued to him three of the ten Roman hornes or Kingdomes to wit Asia Graecia and Syria of which Jury was a part and became absolute Emperour of all the Easterne Empire *âŽ* Vid. Huet in Dan. 7. v. 8. But as for the rest of the ten hornes of the fourth Beast the Roman Empire being the fourth Kingdome upon the earth and diverse also from all the Kingdomes it is said it devoures the residue of the whole earth v. 23. and shall tread it downe and break it in peeces And thus the seven Roman hornes and the one Turkish Horn subduing three of the ten shall go on in their dominions to enslave the generality of the whole earth blaspheming God and making war with the Saints untill a time and times and halfe a time be finished v. 24 25. And then v. 26. the Iudgement shall sit and they i. e. the aforesaid judgement Iudicature or Sessions shall take away the said dominion and shall give it v. 27. to the people of the Saints of the most High Sutable to this Circumstance of order in Rev. 13. 1. c. There is a Beast rising out of the Sea that is the Roman Emperiality or Empire Antichristed or Papized that answers to all those foure Beasts in Daniel 7. For this Beast is like a Lyon in his mouth like a Beare in his feet like a Leopard in his adorned shining skin or faire outside And for his head it is sevenfold with ten hornes which ten hornes say the learned grew all on one head viz. the last of the seven heads said to have ten hornes because so at first as we said but now upon Dan. 7. but it hath for continuance but seven hornes because the Turk the King of the bottomlesse pit Rev. 9.1 to 12. brake off three Againe as the Beast aforesaid in Dan. 7. must hurt but for a time and times and halfe a time or dividing of times So this Beast in this 13 of the Revelation that contains all foure Beasts in Dan. 7. because it hath the evill qualities and Tyrannicall power of all those foure And from this one ariseth the other with one horne breaking off three of the others ten must continue and have power to doe mischiefe two and forty months vers 5. of this 13. of Rev. which two and forty months is made all one with a time and times and halfe a time Rev. 12.14 ¶ 3 The last thing wherein the seventh of Dan. and Rev. the twentieth agrees is in intents viz. to set forth that the Saints shall yet have a glorious Kingdome on earth over which they shall under Christ there reigne For seeing both visions agree in forme and matter and sense who can doubt but they must intend the same thing In that seventh of Dan. it is oft mentioned and hinted in sundry passages that the SONNE OF MAN must have the same Kingdome or dominion which all the foure Beasts had successively and he must give it to the Saints vers 13 14. I saw one like the Sonne of Man and there was given him dominion and glory and a Kingdome that all People and Nations and Languages should serve him His dominion is an everlasting Dominion 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 seculi saith Arias and oft signifies but for a long time expounded presently everlasting that is shall not be destroyed that is by any other earthly Monarch as the other foure destroyed one another vers 17 18. The foure great Beasts are foure Kings expounded here and verse 24. Kingdomes which shall arise out of the earth But the Saints of the most High shall take the Kingdome and possesse the Kingdome which the other foure Beasts had successively v. 19 20 21. the same is repeated againe with applications of the type or vision v. 23 24 25 26 27. All which was never yet fulfilled nor can the ultimate judgement be a time for it In like manner Rev. 20. Christ comes DOWN from heaven v. 1. and chaines up the Devil and for a thousand yeers To what end Not for a state of glory in the highest heavens above as all those passages testifie But that the Saints may rise and reigne with Christ a thousand yeers on earth as it is expresse Rev. 5.10 as a part of the proposition to the whole Revelation that and Chapter 1.7 making up the whole I say to reigne in New Jerusalem which to that end also comes down from heaven Chapter 21.1 and so long to reigne as till Satan bee let loose againe to seduce the Nations that the ultimate judgement begins verse 7. to the end of the Chapter So that what dominion the King of the bottomlesse pit had Rev. 9.1 c. to hurt for five months and what dominion the Beast had for two and forty months Rev. 13. and both under Satan while he was loose that very same in pure substance though not in the evill quality the Saints must have under Christ So that where the Saints were hurt beheaded and persecuted even there they must rise and reigne under Christ a thousand yeers v. 4. of this 20. of Rev. § 6 Thus you see there is great reason why we should looke into the Old Testament as well as into the New for this glorious estate of the Church yet to be on earth Where note for conclusion of this third Section That as God gave the Church in the Old Testament a glorious temporal estate on earth as well as a spirituall viz. That in Paradise on earth so by the like reason he will give both to the Church of the New Testament on earth described in Revel 21 c. as a second Paradise on earth For the New Testament must not be inferiour but rather better then the Old only with this difference The Old Testament-Church being then but in its infancie had the temporall first as a type of the Spirituall The New Testament Church must have the Spirituall first and the Temporall last being then made compleatly up and unto a perfect man according to the stature of Christ Ephes 4. SECT IV. Wherein the Promise to Adam Gen. 1.26 27 28. paralleled with Psalme the eighth as the eighth Psalme with Heb. 2.5 fully opened to prove our maine Position that there is yet to be on earth
did put to death Christ and persecute the Apostles the Apostles thereupon convert the second Psalme with a part of the eighth Psalme for I suppose there is recorded but the summe into a prayer and doe turne the bent of that their prayer both upon Jews and Gentiles They lift up their voyce to God with one accord and said Lord thou art God which hast made Heaven and Earth and the Sea and all that in them is c. as it is Ps 8. who by the mouth of thy servant David hast said Psal 2. v. 1. c. why did the HEATHEN rage and the PEOPLE imagine vaine things The Kings of the earth stood up and the Rulers were gathered together against the Lord and against his Christ For of a truth against thy holy childe Jesus both HEROD and PONTIUS PILATE with the GENTILES and people of ISRAEL were gathered together for to do c. And now Lord behold their threatnings c. Both which Psalmes are prophetical of our point The eighth Psalme we opened afore and now we shall the second out of both which Psalmes though Luke records the story but briefly onely giving a touch upon the beginning of both the Apostles no doubt urged in their prayer whatsoever was in them pertinent to their desire of the advancing Christ there being farre apter pertinences to that in the sequel of those Psalmes then in the beginnings The summe of their desire is that God according to his promise in Psal 2. Psal 8. would set up the power and glory of Christ unto a predominancy over Jews and Gentiles notwithstanding all their fierce opposition at present And for a testimony that God did allow their application of those Psalms as right and did accept of their prayer grounded thereon hee fils them with the Spirit and shakes the place where they prayed Now this second Psalme is not yet fulfilled not the Apostles prayer upon it fully answered It is true that about forty yeers after Christs death came to passe that great destruction upon the Jewes their Temple City and Country too prophesied by Christ Matth. 24.1 c. And within fewer yeers Herod came to a miserable untimely end Act. 12. as also did Pilate and after him successively two and thirty Roman Emperours as the Ecclesiastical story shews us * M. Fox in his Martyr And about three hundred yeers after the incarnation of Christ Constantine the Great and many of his souldiers being converted unto Christianisme overthrew in battel his Antichristian Colleagues and their Armies that opposed it But Prophesies and Prayers as streams run on in a current still growing greater and greater in accomplishment till they rest in the maine Ocean the fulfilling of the full design of God according to the entire Plat-form God drew forth in the expresse termes of his Promises This Psalm therefore according to that rule was not fully accomplished when the Apostles turned it into a Prayer notwithstanding all the great things that Christ and his Apostles did towards the convincing of Jewes and Romans and converting many For what needed the Apostles to pray for a further fulfilling of that second Psalme if then it had been fulfilled No nor is that Psalme in any full measure fulfilled to this day the Heathen unregenerate Gentiles and the obstinate Jewish people are of the same temper still and tamper the same oppositions against Christ And God hath not hitherto so spoken to them in his wrath and vext them in his sore displeasure as to make them know that he hath set HIS KING upon his holy hill of Sion nor hath he given unto Christ the HEATHEN for his inheritance and the UTMOST PARTS OF THE EARTH for his possession to breake them that are incorrigible with a rod of Iron and to dash them in peeces like a Potters vessell to the making of the Kings and Judges of the earth wise to serve the Lord in feare c. Most Kingdomes are yet meere Heathens and the most of Kingdomes named Christians are Hereticall or disobedient unto Christ and Sion it selfe where Christ will mainly manifest his Kinglinesse is under the Turkish Mahometan Blasphemers as it was under the bloudy Heathen Romans all the time of Christ and his Apostles and the Jewes that are a maine part of his Kingdom are to this day unconverted There must yet come a time when Christs anger must be but kindled and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 but as a little and yet then must ALL they be happy that trust in Christ Marke accurately There must be a time when Christs anger must be but kindled in comparison of the last Judgement and but as a little time * So the Hebr. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 is oft applied to time is for degree â—is in kindle in respect of the speedy event of making All them that trust in Christ to be happy Now if you apply this to the time past since the Apostles made their prayer upon this Psalme it is neare one thousand six hundred and twenty years which you cannot call a little time much lesse can you call it a little time from Davids penning of it to this time And if you look forward to the ultimate Iudgement then Christs anger is not only kindled but it is totally on a flame and for ever the fire never goes out So that the fulfilling of this Psalme must be in a time between our present Age and the last Iudgement It must be at a time when Christs anger hath but a little time to be kindled and anon the Trusters in Christ to be blessed which must be when the generation or succession of the wicked opposers of Christ are perished who perishing are not said to be at their journies end at the ultimate end of the world but in the way in some notable way or race they ran in their Generation in opposing Christ as Revel 19. the three last verses These wicked ones must perish and the trusters in Christ be blessed at some notable time of eminent manifestation of Christ as he is Christ and King of Sion which must be before his laying downe of his Mediatorship and power at the end of all I say at some notable time of eminent manifestation of Christ For this phrase in this Psalme THIS DAY HAVE I BEGOTTEN THEE is alwayes applied to such eminent manifestations of Christ the latter still being greater then the former As first in this second Psalme at the declaring the decree and proclaiming Christ to be King conversively of his Church and coercively over all the world of enemies Secondly at Christs resurrection Acts 13.23 and 33. Thirdly in relation to Christs appearance ere long to all the world to set up his visible Kingdome on earth of which we speake 2 ¶ For saith the Apostle Hebr. 1.5 6. unto which of the Angels said he at any time Thou art my SONNE THIS DAY HAVE I BEGOTTEN THEE And againe I will be to him a Father
the whole of Christs passion as it is plaine First by the Title which is of the Canonical Hebrew Text. A Psalme * 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 concerning A jieleth Shahar that is the hind of the morning Christ being shut in the grave escaped away in the morning rising from death Secondly by the application of severall passages to Christs passion by the Evangelist Matth. 27. As that of the DESERTION My God My God why hast thou forsaken me v. 1. That of DERISION ' He trusted in the Lord that he would deliver him let him deliver him v. 8. That of PIERCING They pierced my hands and my feet v. 16. That of division of his garments They parted my garments among them and upon my vesture cast lots v. 18. Now this Psalme touching Christ though in the first Scene sets forth Christs humiliation yet in the second holds forth his exaltation vers 22. I will declare thy name unto my brethren which the Apostle applies Heb. 2.9 10 11 12. to Christs manifestation of his samenesse of nature with the sonnes of men even as in that nature he tasted death for every man and at last would declare that salvation to all the world which clearly tends to our point And v. 27 28 29. we have the effect of his declaring Gods name to the world viz. ALL THE ENDS OF THE WORLD shall remember and turne unto the Lord and ALL THE KINDREDS OF THE Nations or GENTILES * 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 shall worship before him For the Kingdome is the Lords and he is the Governour among the Nations or GENTILES All they that be fat upon the earth shall eat and worship In all which we see the effect effectuall conversion The Generality and Universality in many ALL 's The time in generall viz. It is to be after Christs suffering upon the crosse The characters eat and worship which cannot be understood of the highest heavens And it hath not been fulfilled on earth according to that effect universality and character from Christs passion to this day Therefore it is yet to be fulfilled on earth 5 ¶ According to Psalme 86.9 ALL NATIONS whom thou hast made shall come and worship before thee O Lord and glorifie thy name A place mightily considerable So that so great a promise and prophesie as this by so great a Prophet as this with such a shrill emphasis in the ALL and in the Act worship and in the degree of the effect to glorifie his name must not bee ended with flams of humane glosses but must be really and truly and fully accomplished though as yet it was never compleatly fulfilled as it will be too late to think of those things at the ultimate judgement when Christ comes not for conversion but destruction Therefore yet before that finall Day of Doome this ALL must bee brought to ALL THAT of Worshipping and Glorifying Gods Name 6 ¶ Just as we have it in that little Psalme the 117. but greatly Prophetical Praise yee the Lord ALL NATIONS praise him ALL YEE PEOPLES * 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 How shall all these do this unlesse Christ convert all them but those refractory ones whom he confounds Surely therfore this is a Prophesie that God will in time before the ultimate day of judgement convert generally all Nations as Paul extends it Rom. 11.10 11 c. to the coming in of the fulnesse of Jewes and Gentiles rejoycing together as one Church Therefore according to Paul David had a most comprehensive and extensive sense when he spake these things and therefore shall be fulfilled according to its true latitude and elevation without the mincing distinctions of mens braine For a seale of assurance whereof the close of the Psalme hath three weighty clauses First That the MERCIFULL KINDNESSE of Jehovah to the sonnes of men is great Secondly The TRUTH of the same Jehovah is for ever 3 That by faith and hope in that mercy and truth to see these things fulfilled we should PRAISE that JEHOVAH with Hallelujah which is the word of praise all along the Revelation § 2 Having done with the first head contained in the Psalmes touching the universal power Christ shall have over the whole world afore the last judgement though most yet rebell against him Next wee come to the second head viz. The just time when Christ shall attaine this 1 ¶ That place Psal 97.7 Worship him all yee gods the Apostle tells us Heb. 1.6 shall be fulfilled When God shall bring again his Son Christ into the world which place though our Translators render it And again when he bringeth c. as if it were meerly a new proof of Christs superiority above Angels is most truly rendred according to our reading afore set downe againe and againe with reasons to justifie it so that in words and sense it is an Antithesis and Auxesis to the fifth verse thus He saith not to any Angel thou art my Sonne this day I have begotten theee but instead thereof he speakes a thing that doth much lessen the dignity of Angels and more dignifie Christ above them Let all the Angels of God worship him so that the first And must be turned into But proper to the Greek 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 as there placed and that same Againe is not to signifie another proofe of Christs superiority above Angels but to signifie the time when that of ALL the Elohim Angels and Potentates whether of the Spirits in Heaven or men on earth both Angels and Elohim signifying both worshipping of Christ shall be fulfilled For this hath not yet beene fulfilled as to the ALL of the Magnificents and Great-ones of the earth who contrariwise for the generall have despised if not opposed Christ even as it will bee too late and an unseasonable time for them to do it at the ultimate judgement when no adoration or worship is then received from Christs enemies but sentence is given by him upon and against them The time therefore when this shall bee fulfilled is saith the Apostle in this first to Heb. penned after Christs ascension When God shall bring his first-begotten Sonne AGAINE into the INHABITED WORLD When he brought him into the world the first time by incarnation ALL the Potentates and Angels of men The Scribes and Pharisees Herod and Pontius Pilate the Roman Emperours and Senate of Rome did not worship him but refused him and persecuted him and his members most bloodily for neer three hundred yeers after whom the Arians and next to them the Papacy took their turnes to maintaine that stream of blood running downe to our times But when he shall bring his first-begotten Sonne againe into the world in his visible royal exaltation then they all shall worship him I say as the Text sayes ALL but they that are ruined for their refractorinesse The phrase When he bringeth againe if the Greek word were not of a future sense imports a future thing as the Hebrew imperative Psal 97.7 Worship ye
you see and heare For David is not ascenascended into the heavens but he saith himself THE LORD SAID TO MY LORD SIT THOV ON MY RIGHT HAND UNTIL I MAKE THINE ENEMIES THY FOOTSTOOL therefore let the house of Israel know assuredly that God hath made that same Jesus whom yee have crucified both LORD and THE CHRIST 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 For from hence we may boldly conclude the sence of the Apostle that by Christs ascention not only was the Spirit to be poured out as Ephes 4. Joh. 7.39 but the house of Israel must know assuredly that he was there initiated enstalled and entitled to be LORD and THE CHRIST That as before we opened it out of Luke 19.11 Christ went away to heaven to returne and receive a Kingdome So that Christ must have besides his anointing with his Spirituall power another Lordship to subdue all his enemies to be his footstoole and this the house of Israel must know assuredly now after Christs ascention as after his ascention the Apostle there made that application of the one hundred and tenth Psalme But sure enough to this day neither doth the house of Israel know this assuredly nor are his enemies his footstoole but contrariwise Christ in his repute and in his Members and his Gospel is their footstoole 6 ¶ The Apostle carries on this yet further in 1 Cor. 15. ver 24 to ver 29. Then cometh the end when he shall have delivered up the Kingdome to God the Father when he shall have put downe all rule and all authority and all power For he must reigne till he hath put all enemies under his feet The last enemy that shall be destroyed is death For he HATH marke here he useth the past time put all things under his feet but when he saith all things are put under him it is manifested that he is excepted which did put all things under him And WHEN all things SHALL BE SVBDVED UNTO HIM observe now the Apostle speakes in the future time then also shall the Sonne himselfe be subject unto him that put all things under him You see evidently that in the five and twentieth verse are quoted the words of the one hundred and tenth Psalme and in the twenty seventh verse is quoted part of the eighth Psalme which is the reason why the Apostle speakes there in the past time Not that the things were then fulfilled when the Apostle pend that 1 Cor. 15. for presently in the twenty eighth verse he speakes them in the future but because it is in the Hebrew in Psal 8. in the past time alluding to the type of it in Adam Gen. 1.26 c. Howbeit the sence is a Prophesie of things to come that they shall be all subject to Christ as they were to Adam as this our Apostle applyes it Heb. 2. of which afore These things being premised let us now see what the Apostle doth comment in this 1 Cor. 15. upon that one hundred and tenth Psalme First the Apostle layes it downe for a sure Position in the twenty fourth verse that the END OF ALL is not till Christ hath delivered up the Kingdome to God the Father 2. He gives us a signe in the same verse when he will so give up the Kingdome viz. When he hath put downe all authority rule and power 3. The Apostle proves this out of this one hundred and tenth Psalme ver 1. FOR saith the Apostle ver 25. he must reigne till he hath put all enemies under his feet which is all one with making his enemies his footstoole and plainly holds forth to us by this connexion that part of Christs putting downe all authority and power is to put all his enemies under his feet which saith the Apostle must be so universall that all enemies to Christ or his Members as well things as persons must be comprehended even Death it selfe as the last of all the rest 4. That all things were not subdued unto Christ when the Apostle wrote that 1 Cor. 15. for in the twenty eighth verse he speaketh of them as of things to come viz. when all things SHALL BE SVBDVED VNTO HIM Christ had before that about eighteene yeares by-past * Christ ascended about Anno 34. Paul writ his first Epist to the Corinthians about Anno 52. risen and ascended yet notwithstanding the Apostle speakes of putting all his enemies under Christs feet as of a thing yet to come which doth excellently confirme that sence we give of the Apostles words Heb. 2. viz. that Paul and those of his time did not see all things put under Christ or subject to him though they saw him ascend and to be ascended Nor doe we or have we now about one thousand six hundred yeares since that seen all things subject to Christ whereof the Apostle gives us six signes of assurance for saith the Apostle 1 If all things were subject to Christ then the END cometh ver 24. 2. The full end is not till Christ resigne up all viz. the Kingdome and Dominion c. to God ver 24. 3. That before that be done Death must be destroyed as one of the enemies to be put under Christs feet ver 26. By the destroying of death is not only meant a Morall or Spiritual destruction of it that it shall not prejudice our Salvation for so it hath been destroyed to all Beleevers from the beginning of the Promise of Christ revealed to Eve but Physically that there shall be no more death to the godly Revel 21.4 4. That Death is the last enemy that shall be destroyed ver 26. which is fulfilled to the godly at the beginning of the thousand yeares of which we speake when all the Elect deceased shall rise from the dead the wicked deceased not rising till the end of the said thousand yeares as before we have touched and shall be after demonstrated at which time Death shall be removed from those wicked to the end that they with their companions that a little afore made head against Christ in his Saints may receive their finall Judgement But because the Apostle here mentions Death as an enemy to Christs Kingdome for the death temporall or eternall of the wicked is a friend to Christs Kingdome he must of necessity meane the abolishing of corporall death from the Saints which is performed at the beginning of the thousand yeares which placing of Death in the order and relation of the last of the enemies of Christ and his Church doe clearly intimate that many enemies of Christ and his Saints must be destroyed afore that which stood in opposition to this All-glorious and All-peaceable visible Kingdom of Christ on earth And as death is destroyed Physically as wee have shewed so all that submit not to Christ are destroyed Physically that is they cease to be on earth 5. That Death is not destroyed till the last Trumpet ver 51. 52. in that 1 Cor. 15. Behold I shew you a mystery we shall not all sleep but we shal
without consideration of Gods hand in it and should manage the rod with insolent cruelty to the Jewes that God will bring destruction upon the Assyrian for deliverance of the Jewes The confirmation of this deliverance as is the manner of God in the Prophets hath its foundation laid in the sending of Christ Chapter 11. The promise whereof and description of whose person we have set forth and characterised in the first five verses There shall come forth a rod out of the stem of Jesse c. and the Spirit of the Lord shall rest upon him the Spirit of wisdome c. and he shall not judge after the sight of his eyes but with righteousnesse shall he judge c. So that although in Hezekiahs time wherein Isaiah prophesied the host of the Assyrians were destroyed to the number of one hundred eighty five thousand by the Angel of the Lord 2 Kings 19.35 And againe in the time of Judahs captivity in Babylon they were overthrown with a mighty destruction by the Medes and Persians Dan. 5.30 yet these are not the ALL of the Threat of this Prophesie against Assyria for the Threat is carried on still in Zach. 1.15 to the end of the Chapter though at that time Judah was returned And to keep to this our Text of Isa according to the length of the foundation of this Prophesie must the superstructure be extended viz. to the comming of Christ which coming of him being not restrictively determined to his first coming in his incarnation must be left at large to reach to his second coming at the great Restauration as the Text doth seem to require in mentioning his judging v. 3. his smiting the earth v. 4. c. For we must know to give you Mr. Medes notion Alicubi as neare as I can That the old Prophets for the most part spake of the coming of Christ INDEFINITLY and in GENERALL without that distinction of first and second coming which we have more cleerly learned in the Gospel For this reason those Prophets except Daniel who distinguisheth those comings and the Gospel out of him speake of the things which should be at the coming of Christ indefinitely and altogether which we who are now more fully informed by the Revelation of his Gospel of this distinction of a twofold coming must apply each of them to its proper time Those things which befit the state of his first coming unto it and such things as befit the state of his second coming unto his second And that which befits both alike may be applied to both Which notion of Mr. Mede is the more to be acknowledged in that it may appeare by many instances from the Creation hitherto that the grand promises of great deliverances have their successive and graduall fulfilling from their first promulgation unto the end of this world as daily experience produceth fresh testimonies Calvin on Isa The context saith Isa 10.24 c. Thus saith the Lord O my people that dwellest in Zion be not affraid of the ASSYRIAN Hee shall smite thee with a rod and shall lift up his staffe against thee after the manner of EGYPT For yet a very little while and the indignation shall cease and mine anger IN THEIR DESTRUCTION c. And in that day his burden shall be taken away from thy shoulder c. Now in Hezekiahs time the Assyrian did not smite the Inhabitants of Zion but were smitten by the Angel of the Lord as afore mentioned Nor was the burden of the Assyrian taken away from off the shoulder of the dwellers at Zion at their returne from Babylon by a destruction on them under whom they were then in captivity For the Lord stirred up the spirit of Cyrus their King voluntarily to let them return as we well know the story in the second of Chron. Chapter last and Ezra Chap. 1. And further the Apostles do bring downe many passages of this eleventh of Isaiah unto the Transactions of their times and downwards applying them to the coming of Christ yea to the coming of Christ after his ascention For example ¶ 1. First that in verse 1. There shall come forth a rod out of the stem of Jesse c. is applied by the Apostle Act. 13. v. 22. c. to v. 42. to Christ as the eminent seed of David of the seed of Jesse conjoyning a quotation out of Psal 2. Thou art my Sonne this day have I begotten thee which with other passages in that Psalme as hath been demonstrated signifies Christs visible Kingdome on earth yet to come And a quotation out of Isaiah 55.3 Touching the sure mercies of David And one other quotation out of Ps 16. That his holy one saw no corruption of purpose to prove that though David himselfe be dead yet Christ lives to be the sure mercies of David and to keep off his seed from seeing corruption that in him the ever-living seed of David may reigne to the end of this world and that in some peculiar way priviledge and relation and proportion to David or else the dint and vigor of Isaiahs and the Psalmists Text and the Apostles Commentary is made to languish Which priviledge peculiarity relation and analogy to David what can it bee but a visible Reigning or Kingdome of Christ For Christs Kingdom purely spirituall by his Word and Spirit what doth it more relate to David then to other Christian Kings and Princes of the Gentiles converted from Heathenisme or how more over Davids people or Kingdome more then over all Indians and Heathens where the Gospel is spread and received ¶ 2 Again that in verse the tenth of this eleventh of Isaiah There shall be a root of Jesse which shall stand for an ensign of the people to it shall the GENTILES seek the Apostle Rom. 15.12 draws down to Christ then ascended and gives us this sense of the Prophet That Christ is not onely the OBJECT of faith to the Gentiles but that the Gentiles shall be his SUBJECTS he reigning over them How reigning over them Marke curiously the Apostles words and you may perceive something Againe saith the Apostle There shall be a root of Iesse and he that shall RISE to REIGNE over the Gentiles in him shall the Gentiles trust His reigning as in relation to David doth not commence from his Incarnation but he shall RISE to reigne spoken by the Apostle after Christs Resurrection and Ascention and rendred as you heare by our Translators under a future notion He shall rise to reigne Yea follow the words yet closer even home to the very doores of the Original and you will see I thinke yet more 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. There shall be a root of Iesse and he shall RISE AGAINE to reigne over the Gentiles or stand up AGAINE to reigne over them Christ had before the Apostle penned that risen the first time viz. from the grave of the earth But now that he hath ascended long since up into heaven and there as it
intend to leave out the most of the Jewes viz. ten for two to whom those Strangers were to joyne Nor was this done at the return of the two Tribes from Babylon Then Strangers of the Gentiles joyned not with them Nor was it done at the joyning of the two handfuls the one of Jews the other of Gentiles in the history of the Acts of the Apostles For they could no way answer to Jacob and Israel and Strangers indefinitly spoken without limitation ☜ I have often admonished that the grand prophesied promises touching Christs Kingdome have their gradual successive progressive impletions Redux Juda Juda returning from Babylon was a Type The conversion of an handfull of them in the Apostles time was but the first-fruits Rom. 11. But the fulnesse of Gentiles and Jews is yet behind Thirdly we never yet saw that in the second vers fulfilled That Christians have been servants and handmaids to the Jews in a right religious harmony and complyance For that must be the sense and good news of this promise or else Christians shall have losse and that in things concerning salvation Fourthly nor did we ever see that also in the second verse fulfilled that the Captive Jewes shall take them captive whose Captives they were and rule over their oppressours For neither in their return from Babylon did the Jewes take captive their Captivators but returned by voluntary consent of King Cyrus nor at Christs coming did they take any captive but rather were captives under Augustus and Tyberius Emperours of Rome and of Babylon too as subdued by those Romans the universal Monarchs then of the whole world If any should be of so ayery a phantasie as to evaporate this into a figure that at Christs coming the Jews took their Captivators captive in a spirituall sense of conversion let such remember themselves that Converts are the greatest Free-men Joh. 8.32 And that for the Jews then alas for them the vaile was on them 2 Cor. 3. So that they were generally in a spirituall Captivity themselves like Sampson when his eyes were put out And that Dan. c. 12. intimates that the Iews Conquest over their enemies should be corporall Neither of which Conquests do we yet see that the Jews either corporally or spiritually have subdued them that captivated them Fifthly neither was that in the second verse ever yet fulfilled That the PEOPLES or Gentiles should take the Iewes and bring them to their place c. Calvin on this place grants thus much That this was not done after the Iewes coming out of Babylon giving this reason That the Gentiles were so far from being the conduct and assistance to the Iews in their returne and settlement and to contribute their service to them therein that they did not only trouble the Iews but destroyed them from off the earth quoting Ezra 4.4 Adding that therefore this must be fulfilled in through and by Christ Thus far Calvin But when was this yet ever done by Christ Surely those seeds in Christ and the Apostles time could not be the Harvest here meant whole Iacob and Israel were not then in the land of the Lord. Nor are they to this day But are for the generall under the dominion of Turks Romans Indians and Countries in every Nation almost under heaven rather serving the Gentiles then being served of the Gentiles And therefore this cannot be done till as Dan. 2. that the little stone Christ cut out of the mountain without hands breaks to peeces the fourfold-mettaled image of all the foure Monarchies of the earth Whereas yet the Roman Monarchy in great part stands to this day Sixtly The twelve Tribes of Iacob and Israel are not yet as it is v. 3. delivered from their sorrow and fear and bondage They are in bondage being scattered amongst all Nations They are in sorrow for that scattering from their own Country And are there in fear being forced to pay tribute for their own freedome Nor were they freed from that bondage in Christs time being then Captives under the Romans Nor from their fear but for fear of the Romans if they should owne Christ they crucified him and put him to death Therefore when this deliverance is fulfilled to purpose it is done as it follows in the seventh clause and consideration v. 4 5 6 7 That the Jews shall take up this Proverb How hath the OPPRESSOUR ceased The Lord hath broken the SCEPTER of the RULERS and the staffe of the WICKED so that the WHOLE EARTH is at REST and QUIET that they break forth into SINGING But nor Scripture nor Histories nor Experience shew us that ever these things were fulfilled to this day And at the ultimate day of judgement will be no meet time for such work as every mans own reason will easily prompt Therefore it is yet to be done afore the ultimate day of judgement SECT XV. THe fifth place in Isaiah is Chapter 24. verse 23. Then the Moon shall be confounded and the Sun ashamed when the Lord of Hosts shall reigne in Mount Zion and in Jerusalem and before his Ancients gloriously * R. Kimchi upon this Chapter hath these words 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 This parasha or Section is to be fulfilled hereafter 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 In the destruction of Edom 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Afterward he shall remember the salvation of ISRAEL To understand what he means by Edome he bids us upon v. 16. Look 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 upon the destruction of ROME mentioned in the who le book of God To these few words I shall need to speak but few THEN relating to that afore in verse 22 23. fetcheth its sense from thence In that day say the 22 and 23. verses It shall come to passe that the Lord shall punish the host of the High ones that are on high and the Kings of the earth upon the earth meaning plainly as the last clause evidenceth the Gentile-Potentates and powers And they those Gentiles shall be gathered together as prisoners are gathered in the pit and shall be shut up in the prison And after many dayes THEY the Jews saith Calvin giving a strong reason * Quum igitur haec ad sustinendos FIDELES pertinerent non dubium quin IUDAEIS dicerentur apud quos potissimum fides crat aut potius nusquam apud alios apparebat shall be visited To which sense touching the Iews the subsequent words also in the next verse the Text wee are now upon do mightily concur The Moon shall be confounded c. when the Lord shall reigne before his Ancients The originall and rise of which then you now see That upon the great destruction of the impenitent Gentile-Potentates and Powers the Iewes and if you will include the penitent Gentiles it shall not grieve us shall be visited in mercy And the Moon shall be confounded c. that is the glory of the Church shall be such as the light of the Moon and
expresse in v. 4 5 6. shall be forced to let Jacob and Israel goe free The Lord will as it is v. 19. do a NEW THING which must properly signifie a thing never done afore to make way for their returne and liberty as it is expresse v. 19. c. before set downe at large Which wanton wits may endeavour to elude with Allegories and Phantasmes of their owne hatching which neither can convince a rationall Christian nor deliver the Jewes according to the intent of the Prophet Who though afore that their deliverance as in v. 22. c. they should not call upon God as they ought but should be weary of the Lord and should weary the Lord with their iniquities and therefore they are given up to the curse and to the reproach yet after these things as it followes in the 44. Chapter and first seven verses as an Antithesis to their said evill condition the Lord promiseth and the Prophet prophesieth it that they should have a glorious condition saying Yet now heare O Jacob my servant and ISRAEL whom I have chosen Thus saith the Lord that made thee c. Fear not O Jacob and thou Jesurun the name also of the twelve Tribes Deut. 32. I will poure water upon him that is thirsty and flouds upon the dry ground I will POUR MY SPIRIT upon thy seed and my blessing upon thine off-spring And they shall spring up among the grasse as willows by the water-courses One shall say I am the Lords and another shall call himselfe by the name of Jacob and another shall subscribe with his hand unto the Lord and surname himselfe by the name of Israel Thus saith the Lord the KING of Israel I am the first and I am the last Who as I shall CALL and declare it and SET IT IN ORDER for me since I appointed the ancient people and the things that ARE COMMING and SHALL COME § 5 Thus you see the present state of the Jewes as in the latter end of the former Chapter viz. sinfull and dolefull you see their names viz. Jacob Israel and Jesurun all names of the twelve Tribes you see what is meant by pouring water upon the thirsty viz. pouring out of the spirit you see what is meant by growing as willows by the water-courses viz. by the effusion of the Spirit multitudes shall own the Lord you see what Titles Christ hath of KING of ISRAEL and of FIRST and LAST which are his Titles when he prophesies of his visible Kingdome to be on earth repeated several times in the Revelation Now then deal ingeniously and compare the expressions with the Jewes condition for above these one thousand six hundred and fifty yeers to this very day and see then whether you can indeed and bonâ fide imagine that these Prophesies have been ever yet fulfilled or that it is proper or feisable that they should be fulfilled at the ultimate day of Doom SECT XIX THe tenth place in Isaiah is Chapter 45. v. 14. * Touching v. 14. to v. 22. I will onely insert Mr. Medes Notes in the margin because it came not timely enough to bee put into the Text Esaiae vaticinium cap. 45. a versu 14. deinceps in eodem Adventu secundo Christi implendum restatur Apostolus ad Rom. c. 14. v. 11. omnes enim inquit stabimus ante Tribunal Christi scriptum est enim nempe in hoc Esaiae vaticinio vivo ego dicit Dominus quoniam mihi flectetur omne genu omnis lingua confitebitur Deo Quod si haec Prophetiae pars in secundo Christi adventu in die nimirum Judicii adimplenda restet etiam reliqua eodem pertinere necesse est Est autem Prophetiae initium hujusmodi Sic dicit Dominus labor Aegypti negotiatio Cush Sabaeorum VIRORUM MENSURAE i. e. MERCATORUM 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 sic Targum quod mensuris utantur non MEN OF STATUR ad te O tu captiva vel O civitas mea transibunt tui erunt post te ambulabunt in compedibus ad te incurvabunt se te deprecabuntur dicentes Tantum in te Deus est non est alius praeter ipsum Deus In Hebraeo enim omnia haec pronomina sunt generis faeminini quare ad Cyrum referri nequeunt sed ad Jerusalem captivam de qua in versu praecedenti mentionem habuit quemque ad majorem rei evidentiam sic verterem ego suscitavi Cyrum in justitia omnes vias ejus dâ—â—gam Ipse aedificabit civitatem meam captivam meam 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 DIMITTET idque fine pretio muncre dicit Dominus exercitum Tunc sequuntur verba quae paulo ante recitavi Sic dicit Dominus labor Aegypti c. q. d. parum est quod reaedificaberis â—emitteris Imo vero magna re O captiva mea O civitas mea manet olim faelicitas Observandum est enim Dominum inde a fine versus undecimi espondere quasi interrogationi de Fatis filiorum fuorum juxra quod praemisit ventura interrogate me de filiis meis de operibus mamanuum earum praecipite mihi nempe ut narrem vobis quae futura sunt Thus far Mr. Mede By which it is most plaine that he thinks and shews for it great strength of reason that this place of Isa is to be understood of a glorious state of the Church to be on earth at Christs second coming to the end of the Chapter but specially verse 22 23 24 25. viz. verse 22. Looke unto me and be yee saved all the ends of the earth for I am God and there is none else 23. I have sworne by my selfe the word is gone out of my mouth in righteousnesse and shall not returne that unto me every knee shall bow every tongue shall swear 24. Surely shall one say in the Lord have I righteousnesse Heb. righteousnesses and strength even to him shall men come and all that are incensed against him shall be ASHAMED 25. In the Lord shall the seed of Israel bee justified and shall glory § 1 For those foure last verses of the Chapter this is that I have to say The Prophet having spoken to JACOB and ISRAEL v. 17 18 19. Israel shall be saved in the Lord with an everlasting salvation and shall not be ASHAMED nor confounded world without end for thus saith the Lord that created the Heavens and formed the earth hee hath created it not in vaine he formed it to be INHABITED which phrases Not ashamed c. and to be inhabited extend that everlasting salvation to comprehend a blessed salvation on earth too I have not spoken in secret in a darke place of the earth I said not to the seed of JACOB seek ye me in vaine I say the Prophet having spoken to Jacob and Israel names comprehending all twelve Tribes next he extends his speech more generally with them to all the Nations of the world v.
which at the ultimate day of judgement cannot be imaginable and therefore are yet to be fulfilled before that day SECT XXX THE fourth place in Jeremiah is in Chapter 50. the foure last verses viz. v. 17 18 19 20. The words are these Verse 17. ISRAEL is a scattered sheep the Lions have driven him away first the KING of ASSYRIA hath devoured him and last this NEBUCHADNEZZAR King of BABYLON hath broken his bones v. 18. Therefore thus saith the Lord of Hosts the God of ISRAEL Behold I will punish the King of BABYLON and his land as I have punished the King of ASSYRIA v. 19. And I will bring ISRAEL again to his HABITATION and he shall feed on CARMEL and BASHAN and his soul shall be satisfied on mount EPHRAIM and GILEAD § 1 That this Prophesie is not yet fulfilled nor can it be fulfilled at the ultimate day of judgement and therefore to bee fulfilled on earth afore that day note first that he dittie is of ISRAEL which must at least comprehend the ten Tribes which appears not onely in styling God here in relation to this the God of ISRAEL but by severall passages after that all the twelve Tribes are here meant Now the deliverance of the ten Tribes was never yet performed to this day § 2 Secondly the deliverance must be in a hostile way viz. by the destruction of their enemies namely of Kings and Kingdomes expressed v. 18. in relation to which God is called the Lord of Hosts But as yet the Kings and Kingdoms who in a constant succession down to this day have been the enemies of the Jews are not destroyed § 3 Thirdly that God promiseth to come downe in a methodicall order to punish their enemies successively in time and place as successively as they afflicted the twelve Tribes First the King of Assyria had devoured Israel which can be no other then Salmaneser his taking Samaria c. captive 2 King 18.9 which Samaria was the Metropolis of the Kingdome of the ten Tribes And this is the King of Assyria's devouring Israel Nineveh being the Metropolis of that Kingdome whiles called the Kingdome of Assyria 2 King 19.36 Then secondly Nebuchadnezzar alias Nebuchadrezzar King of Babylon came up against Jerusalem the Metropolis of the Kingdome of the two Tribes and took it and carried away all the considerable persons of that Kingdome and all their substance of any value captive to Babylon 2 King 25.1 c. And this was the King of Babylon his breaking of their bones called the King of Babylon because Babylon then was the Metropolis of the Kingdome of Chaldea the Chaldeans then ruling over the Assyrians And therefore the Monarchy was afterwards called the Assyrio-chaldean Now as God hath punished some of their enemies heretofore viz. Nineveh of Assyria according to the Prophet Nahum And Sennacherib their King and his Host 2 King 19. So he must according to his promise descend in order with destruction in an hostile manner upon Babylon and upon the Kings of Babylon whatsoever and whosoever that Babylon and those Kings be in the Scripture name and notion and extended in the promises of the New Testament And therefore as God did punish Nebuchadnezzar King of Babylon with turning him as it were into a beast for certaine yeers Dan. 4. And after hee punished Belshazzar King of Babylon and that City by Darius the Mede invading it Dan. 5. and Darius the Mede then King of Babylon by Alexander the Greek and Alexanders successours then King of Babylon by the Roman and the Roman Emperour then King of Babylon both old and new that is Babylon and Rome by the Arabian Saracen or Turk the now King of old Babylon Dan. 7. so according to the explication and application in the New Testament of this promise made in this Text in the Old God must yet goe on corporally to destroy the Turk the present King of old Babylon and the Roman that once was the Tyrant of Old Babylon and after that continued to be the Tyrant of New Babylon viz. Rome first by Heathen Tyranny and after by Papal and Antichristian Tyranny down to this day acording to Prophesies in Dan. 7. and this must bee done by the power of Christ and his Church ibid. and Dan. 2. Now neither the Turkish King of Babylon nor his Kingdome is yet destroyed but rather mightily prospers and prevailes yea and God is behinde in arrears of judgements with New Romish Babylon for her heathenish ten bloody persecutions extending by intervals about three hundred yeers and hath not given her her present pay for her late Papal and Antichristian massacres inquisitions tortures and blasphemies as to the matter of destroying the supream power and the Kingdome of this Babylon according to the amplification of Revelation 17 18 and 19 Chapters § 4 Note fourthly that the successive punishing the enemies of the Jews in succeeding generations following this Prophesie must so succeed as to have this successe that ISRAEL and JUDAH may be delivered from their dispersion and restored to their own land and distinctly to their severall quarters there viz. Carmel Bashan Ephraim and Gilead One Carmel was a City of the Tribe of Judah some twelve miles from Jerusalem Southward Another Carmel was of the Tribe of Issachar about threescore and foure miles from Jerusalem Northward not farre from Prolemais toward the shore of the Mediterranean Sea Josh 19. Jer. 46. Bashan before the Israelites came up from Egypt to Canaan was of the Country of Og but after became part of the portion of the half Tribe of Manasseh Numb 21. Isa 2.13 Mount Ephraim is between Jericho and Jerusalem extending towards the Sea It was the portion of the sonnes of Joseph Ephraim and Manasseh Josh 13. and 17. And as one halfe of the Tribe of Manasseh stuck to Judah so Ephraim is an usuall expression to signifie the Kingdome of the ten Tribes or Israel Isa 7. Isa 9. Hos 5. Psal 59. Gilead was a Country that lay between the sea of Galilee and mount Gilead some sixty miles from Jerusalem It separates the Country of Galilee from Israel By this description of the scituation and owners of these places it evidently appeares that Gods minde in this Prophesie of Jeremy is that not onely the two Tribes but also the other ten and so all twelve are to be restored to their own land though it cost the ruine of all Kings of all Babylons whatsoever But this is not yet fulfilled as the present and long time past condition of those twelve Tribes sadly speak § 5 Therefore as sure as God is true these Prophesies of Jeremiah must be yet fulfilled on earth And that before the ultimate day of judgement as we said before the nature of the things necessarily requiring it Thus of Jeremiah SECT XXXI NExt wee come to the Prophet Ezekiel The first place is in Chapter 28. v. 24 25 26. Vers 24. There shall be NO MORE a pricking briar unto the house of ISRAEL
¶ 3. Such a Kingdome is here intended as was to be continued to the Jewes without alteration So the Text it shall not be given to another people from Daniels people But when Christ first came and brought his Spirituall Kingdome whiles to be meerly spirituall he first preached the Gospell to the lost sheep of the house of Israel from whom notwithstanding the Gospell was taken away and given to the Gentiles The which Argument is yet more plainly laid downe in Dan. 7. ver 18. The Saints of the most high shall take the Kingdomes from the Beasts and possesse it for ever and ever To which some answer the words are to be understood of a strange people Whereunto I reply the sence is the same another people or a strange people are indifferently the same sith all were esteemed strangers to the Jewes which were not Jewes Others object it shall not be given to another people because Christ will exercise his spiritual Lordship himselfe To which sence I will subscribe if any shew me who did exercise this spirituall Lordship before the coming of Messiah For so much the words sound That whereas you have been held under the Tyrants of this world thus long upon the recovery of your Kingdome it shall never be resigned to any as it hath been Now nothing makes more against them then this For it our Lord did assume such a Kingdome as was formerly resigned to others it cannot be meant of spirituall regiment ¶ 4. Such a Kingdome is here meant as must answer to Daniels scope in his answer to the Kings dreame But if this Kingdome be meant spiritually only then Daniel had missed the scope much For Nebuchadnezzar had his thoughts busied about the issue of HIS Monarchy according to which thoughts the dream was directed Daniel interpreting it undertakes to resolve him fully For in a word Daniel intends two main points 1. To comfort the Jewes in the losse of their Kingdom liberty shewing that after many changes it should be restored to them againe 2. To convince the King of his Tyranny over them by which his third Heire should be nothing the warmer another should take it from him a third from him and a fourth from him which at length maugre all their despight should be returned to the Jewes in greater glory then ever they lost it Now whether the spirituall Kingdome of Christ â—oth answer this scope or no I leave to the judgement of the godly wise Thus Mr. Huet to whom in the generall and maine I fully consent § 5 Next let us heare Mr. Parker on this second of Daniel The maine controversie saith he in this vision is about the iron feet and legs and the stone that smote them The opinion of some is that the legges and toes of iron signifie the successors of Alexander in the Grecian Monarchy and especially the Seleucidae And that the Stone cut out of the mountaine signifies Christ at his first coming and his spirituall Kingdome But this cannot stand ¶ 1. Because every metall signifies a distinct Kingdome and the fullnesse and complement theâ—eof from the beginning to the perfect end And therefore as the brazen belly and thighes are the whole and perfect Grecian Kingdome so accordingly the legs and feet of iron doe signifie another Kingdome distinguished from the Grecian which cannot be the Seleucidae and other Successors in the same Kingdome For as the golden head signified the whole Babylonian Kingdome and the silver breast and armes the Persian so the brazen belly and thighes the whole Grecian including the Seleucidae and the other Successors For these make up the integrity â—nd fulnes of the Grecian Monarchy or Kingdom as much as the Successors of Nebuchadnezzar make up the integrity of the Babylonian or as much as the Successors of Cyrus doe concur to the perfect constitution of the Persian And so when the Greeke Kingdome is proposed Dan. chap. 8. ver 21 22. it is expresly described as constituted not onely of Alexander the Great but also of the Seleucidae and other the successors in the same Kingdome ¶ 2. This Vision must reach to the last dayes chap. 2.28 which could not be if the legges and feet the extreame and utmost part of the image should end in the Seleucidae for as much as this Kingdome expired before the birth of Christ ¶ 3. Because the legges are said to be of iron in comparison of the parts and Kingdomes going before which were of weaker metals Whereas the Seleucidae and the other successâ—rs of Alexander had not the strength of Alexander c. 8.21.22 Thou wilt-say the Kingdom is represented by iron onely in relation to the Church whereunto it was more terrible then the former I reply 1 As the two first Kingdomes are represented by unequall metalls the first of gold the second of silver to note an absolute inferiority of the one unto the other chap. 2.39 so by proportion the two following of brasse and iron to note an absolute imparity in strength between the latter and the former Wherefore the Iron Kingdome must be absolutely and in it selfe stronger then the Brazen and not onely in respect of particular exercise and imployment of its strength against the people of the Church 2. The Iron Kingdome is expresly said to be as iron because it brused all these that is the former Kingdoms and not onely because more terrible to the Jewes ver 40. 3. Because it is the same with the fourth beast with the iron teeth chap. 7. v. 7. which is therefore so represented because it devouâ—ed the WHOLE EARTH and not the Jewes onely 4. Because Nebuchadnezzar and Haman in the former Kingdomes were more formidable to the Jewes then the Seleucâ—dae And therefore there is no reason that in this respect only the fourth should be represented by Iron in comparison of the former Kingdomes as stronger and more terrible then those ¶ 4. In the dayes of these Kings shall the God of Heaven set up the Kingdome of his Sonne Whereas the Seleucidae and the whole Greeke Empire was utterly dissolved before the birth of Christ v. 44. § 6 Neither can the Stone that smote the Image be Christ at his first coming and his Kingdome immediately following c. for the reasons following ¶ 1. Because the Kingdome signified by the stone must breake in peeces all the other Kingdomes But this Kingdome of Christ ☞ that was and is between his first and second coming was not appointed for the breaking down of all earthly Kingdomes this being the time of the Gentiles Luk 21.24 and for the adversary to reign and for the Church to be trampled under foot Rev. 11.2 ¶ 2. Againe the Kingdome here spoken of doth breake in peeces all other Kingdomes so that those being utterly extinct this alone doth stand in place of them ver 44. Now this state is not to be expected under the Kingdome of Patience or before the fall of Antichrist who fallen the Kingdomes of the earth
shall become the Lords and his Christs Rev. 11.15.18 ¶ 3. Further what prerogative and advancement had it been for the Kingdome of Christ SPIRITUAL to have broken down ☞ the Selcucidae and other Horns of the Greeke Empire as long as another Kingdome the Kingdom of the Romans succeeded in their place to beate downe the Church by the Heathen Emperors and Antichrist for longer space of time and with greater and more terrible persecution then ever before § 7 Contrarily I affirme that the legges feet and toes of the iron doe signifie the Roman Kingdome 1. Because it is represented by a distinct mettall coming after the Brazen belly and thighes which is the Grecian For no other distinct Monarchy came after the Grecian but this as History doth shew 2. Because t is stronger then all the rest and breaketh them in peeces Dan. 2.40 3. The Iron legs and feet are parallell with the Iron teeth of the fourth Beast which signifies the Roman Kingdome Dan. 7.7 4. The ten toes representing the ten Kings are accordingly a character of the Roman Kingdome Revel 12.3 and 13.1 and 17.12 5. T is such a Kingdome as must stand to be destroyed by the Kingdome of the Saints in the end of time and therefore can be no other ☜ then the Roman Kingdome yet continuing under Antichrist § 8 The Stone is the Kingdome of the Saints as it is interpreted Dan. 2.44.45 with chap. 7.26 27. ☜ And that is the Kingdome to be set up at the fall of Antichrist as it appeareth by these reasons 1. Because it shal be set up to destroy all adverse Kingdoms in the world which cannot be expected til about the time of the fal of Antichrist ☜ 2. It shall not rise till about the sounding of the seventh Trumpet which is the time of the fall of Antichrist Revel 11.15 16 17. 3. Then and not before it shall fill all the earth ver 34 35.44 45. that is all Kingdoms shall be subject unto it chap. 7.26 27. compare Rev. 11.15 Thus Mr. Parker to whom in the maine and generall of his matter I assent § 9 In the last place let us hear Mr. Archer speak in his fore-cited book p. 7. 8. And then I shall take my turne The fourth Monarchy saith he was that of the Romans which because it began farre lower then the rest viz. more Westward and yet rose as high Eastward as the highest of the former therefore it became a mightier Monarchy then all the three former This is expressed in this second of Daniel by legges of Iron because it was the strongest of all and subdued all under it But in processe of time the body of the world which it bore up being so great to which it was a leg it divided it selfe into two legges viz. the Easterne and Westerne Monarchy Which yet though divided was as strong as Iron and held all Nations under them But in processe of time fell into feet and toes The Eastern Monarchy was swallowed up by the Turke the Westerne fell into divers Kingdomes But among these sub-divided Kingdomes was strength and weaknesse the feet being part of iron and part of clay And much mingling there shall be amongst them to re-joyne the Kingdomes into one body some whereof are weak and some strong as iron and clay but never shall be as Iron cannot be mixed with clay The Spaniards and Austrians of Spaine and Germany and other Nations of Europe some of which are strong and some weake have sought by marriages and other covenants to mingle and re-joyne themselves into one Monarchy but it shall never bee as we cannot mingle iron and clay But in the period and up-shot of their Soveraignty and Monarchy they shall remaine distinct Kingdomes as Feete and Toes of Iron and Clay partly weake and partly strong § 10 Now in the dayes of this Roman Monarchy this fourth Western Monarchy there shall be a stone cut out without hands which shall ruine these Kingdomes smiting the Image on the feet of iron and clay and so swallow up the whole image all the fore-going Monarchies being brought under it and by it to nothing And it becomes a Monarchy over the whole earth where ever the former Monarchies had ruled ver 35. That is as it is explained ver 44 45. a Kingdome which that stone shall obtaine set up by the hand of the God of Heaven Whereas the other Kingdomes or Monarchies were erected by men on earth though permitted and ordered by God This Kingdome or Monarchy shall swallow up in it all fore-going Monarchies And this is a FIFT Monarchy which shall arise in the world after the former foure which is meant of a state of Christs Kingdome as appeares by severall reasons ¶ 1. Marke it is called a Stone as Christ is the cheife corner stone which the builders refused 1 Pet. 2. v. 3. c. to 8. ¶ 2. Againe it is a stone not in hand or cut out without hands Because God shall reare up this Kingdome As touching Mr. Archers words of Gods rearing up this Kingdome without hands of humane helpe I cannot insert or assent to while I stick at that place in Daniel chap. 12. ver 1. c. that when Michael shall stand up to deliver his people meaning the great and generall deliverance of the Jewes from temporall and spirituall captivity there shall be a great time of trouble such as there never was since it was a Nation even to that same time Insomuch that many of the Jewes afore as it were a sleep in the dust or as dead men in their forlorne hopelesse and helplesse condition shall now at Christs appearance awake and stand up for the cause of their deliverance yet some of them shall fall off to their everlasting shame According to which there is a double period of time relating to their deliverance mentioned in the eleventh and twelfth verses of that chapter as if it should begin at one thousand two hundred and ninety yeares after the ceasing of the daily sacrifice but they onely should be blessed that wait and come to the one thousand three hundred thirty and fifth year which is forty five years after But of the full meaning of this place to this sence and the demonstration thereof we shal hear after in our last place of Daniel This I confesse and I can freely conceive that whereas the Church of Christ is that stone that Kingdome of Christ as Mr. Mede Mr. Huet and Mr. Parker have afore well expressed or hinted so Christs call of the residue of the Church into the state of grace at the great and last bringing in of the Jewes shall be so immediately and suddenly done by Christ himselfe by his appearing in the clouds and such like extraordinary wayes as in the birth of a Nation at once as the Prophet describes their call that there shall not be used for ought I know the Ministry of mens preaching to that end ¶ 3. It s
duration saith Mr. Archer that it shall last for ever shewes that it is meant of Christs Kingdome We people saith he shall swallow it up as they have done all other Monarchies The Babylonian was left to the Medes and Persians and this to the Grecians and the Grecian to the Romans But this shall be left to none but shall be for ever Dan. 2.44 that is to the worlds end But the Kingdome at the Worlds end shall be Christs for at the last end of all he gives it up to the Father 1 Cor. 15.24 Therefore till then and at that time when ALL ENDS he hath the Kingdom Christs SPIRITUALL Kingdome and his PROVIDENTIALL were before this time Therefore that which is to begin when these Monarchies end must be Christs Monarchy wherefore from this prophesie we learne that Christ shall have a MONARCHICALL STATE ON EARTH and a VISIBLE KINGDOME as other Monarches had swallowing up or causing to vanish all other Monarchies as the latter Monarchies did the former Thus Mr. Archer to whom in the bulk and sum with the explanation afore I assent § 10 By this you have seen some of my good company in this point consenting with me upon the strong reasons they have produced how deduceable our position in the main is out of this Chapter I shall not need to adde any thing by way of argument but only a few words for further explanation of this prophesie ¶ 1. Note how aptly and appositely this fift Monarchy this Monarchy of Christ that is Christ the Monarch and the Christian Church the Saints his Monarchy is compared unto a Stone cut out of the Mountaine c. We know that Christ is often called or typified by a rocke or Stone Matth. 16.18 1 Cor. 10.4 quoted out of Moses Numb 20.8 And the Church is compared to an house built on or in a rocke Matth. 7. Matth. 16. and Zech. 3.7 seven eyes upon one stone is saith Junius the Church built on Christ ¶ 2. Some stone as the Adamant that cannot be filed is harder then iron and an huge stone of any sort falling from a Mountaine will breake the iron that is under it much more the iron that is mixed with clay So Christ and his Church shall make up a Monarchy that shall be too hard and weighty for the fourth the Roman Empire or Monarchy that brake the rest to beare Matth. 21.42 44. Did yee never read in the Scriptures The STONE which the builders rejected is become the head of the corner whosoever shall fall on this STONE Christ shall be broken but on whomsoever it shall FALL it will grind him to powder Zech. 12.3 And in that day I will make Jerusalem a BURDENSOME STONE for all peoples all that burthen themselves with it shall be CUT IN PEECES though all the people of the earth bee gathered together against it ¶ 3. T is said the Stone was CUT out of the mountaine WITHOUT HANDS but withall it is said It SMOTE as a STONE against the Image and as a STONE it brake the MATTER of the Iron and Clay Whence I cannot conceive otherwise but though Christ the Monarch was conceived without man by the Holy Ghost c. and his Church his Monarchy both Jewes and Gentiles is and shall be effectually called and regenerated by the same holy Spirit without humane help yet Christ and his Church shall by a visible hand of power dash in peeces the fourth Monarchy the Roman Pope and his Armies Territories and Powers and the Turke and his which sprang out of the Roman as is afore demonstrated I say shall dash it in peeces by a visible hand of power Dan. 12. Rev. 16. Rev. 19. ¶ 4. The meaning of the continuance of this Monarchy of Christ for ever doth not signifie as if it should never have any end as if Christ should never lay downe all his power of regiment for the contrary is expresse in 1 Cor. 15.24.28 but the meaning is this 1. That it shall never be DESTROYED verse 44. of this second of Daniel that is it shall not end with a devastation and desolation as the former Monarchies did 2. It shall not be LEFT TO OTHER PEOPLE ibid. ver 44. that is other people shall never succeed the Saints or Church of Christ to possesse this fift Monarchy as another people successively succeeded and possessed the other Monarchies by turnes the Medes and Persians took the Assyrio-Chaldean and so down-ward 3. That it shall STAND FOR EVER that is as is explained in that same 44. verse this shall continue when the other Monarchies shall be broken to peeces 4. That the end of this Monarchy of Christ so farre as it may have an end is onely formally of the power or mode of government by Christ he resigning his power to God himselfe 1 Cor. 15.24 28. not materially for the Saints shall continue for ever eternally happy under the wing of the beatificall vision of God himselfe ¶ 5. This visible Kingdome or Monarchy of Christ is to follow the rest in an immediate order and succession of naturall time and in the same physicall place of or upon the Earth as when and where the former having existed their terme were exterminated For if this Monarchy of Christ succeeded onely in eternity in the Empyrean highest Heaven It can bee said no more to succeed the said foure Monarchies as Daniel would by all meanes have it then it succeeded any other Empire or Kingdome on Earth especially those that were contemporary with these foure aforesaid Monarchies yet not subject to them as some such there were all the time of their duration * This last clause of some Kingdome extant in the time of the four Monarchies yet no subject to them is also asserted by Mr. Mede and t is confirmed by Hist and exper SECT XXXVI THE next place in Daniel for our Thesis is in chapter the seventh throughout From whence saith Mr. Mede †Viâ—e Mr. Mede Diatrib par 4. p. 420. as from the mother Text of Scripture the CHURCH OF THE JEWS grounded the name and expected the great Day of Judgement ** What he means by the great Day of Judgement see by and by at the 2 ☞ with the circumstances thereof and whereunto almost all the descriptions and expressions thereof in the New Testament have reference For in the Vision of this seventh of Daniel we have a SESSION OF JUDGEMENT when the fourth BEAST CAME to be DESTROYED Where we see the great ASSISES represented after the manner of the great SYNEDRION or CONSISTORIE OF ISRAEL Wherein the PATER JUDICII the Father of the Judicatory had his ASSESSORES his Assistants or Assessors sitting upon seates semi-circle-wise before him from his right hand to his left I BEHELD saith DANIEL verse 9. TILL THE THRONES OR SEATS WERE PITCHED DOWN * Vulg lat Donec Throni positi sunt LXX and Theodot 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The Chal. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 fic 〈◊〉
〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 usurpatum de Solâ—o invenies apud Chald parâ—p Jerem. 1.15 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 ubi in Hebr. est 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Sept. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 namely for the Senators to sit upon not throwne down as we of late have it And the ANCIENT OF DAIES Pater Consistorii did sit c. and subaudi I BEHELD TILL THE JUDGEMENT WAS SET that is the whole Sanhedrim and the books were opened Here we see both the forme of judgement delivered and the name of judgement expressed which is afterwards twice more expressed 1. In the amplification of the Tyranny of the WICKED HORN ver 21 22. which is said to bee continued TILL THE ANCIENT OF DAIES CAME and judgement was given to the Saints of the most High i. e. Potestas judicandi ipsis facta And the second time in the Angels interpretation verse 26. But the JUDGEMENT SHALL SIT and they shall take away the dominion to consume and to destroy to the end Where observe by the way that cases of DOMINION of BLASPHEMY and APOSTASY c. belonged to the jurisdiction of the great SANHEDRIM From this description it came that the Jewes gave it the name of 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The Day of Judgement And 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The day of the great Judgment Whence in the Epist of Jude v. 6. it is called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the judgement of the great Day From the same description they learned that the destruction then to bee should be BY FIRE because it is said verse 9. His throne was a FIERY FLAME and his WHEELES BURNING A fiery streame issued and came forth before him And ver 11. The Beast was slaine and his body destroyed and given to the BURNING From the same fountaine are derived those expressions in the Gospell where this day is intimated or described THE SON OF MAN SHALL COME IN THE CLOUDS OF HEAVEN The son of man shall come in the GLORY OF HIS FATHER WITH HIS HOLY ANGELS as it is said here thousands ministred unto him c. And that Daniel saw one like the sonne of man coming with cloudes of Heaven and he came to the ancient of Daies and THEY brought him or placed him neare him c. Hence St. Paul learned THE SAINTS SHOULD JUDGE THE WORLD because it is said that MANY THRONES WERE SET and ver 22. by way of exposition JUDGEMENT WAS GIVEN TO THE SAINTS OF THE MOST HIGH Hence the same Apostle learned to confute the false feare of the Thessalonians that the day of Christs second coming was then at hand because that day cannot be till the MAN OF SIN WERE FIRST COME and should have reigned his APPOINTED TIME for as much as Daniel had foretold it should bee so and that his destruction should bee at the SONNE OF MANS APPEARING IN THE CLOUDES whose appearing therefore was not to bee till then This is 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 in Saint Paul the appearance or brightnesse of his coming Which man of sin saith he Christ shall destroy at the 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 appearance of his coming Daniels wicked HORN or the BEAST acting in the wicked horn is St. Pauls MAN OF SIN But to go on whiles this Judgement sits and when it had destroyed the FOURTH BEAST the sonne of man which comes in the cloudes receives DOMINION AND GLORY and A KINGDOM THAT ALL PEOPLE NATIONS and LANGUAGES SHOULD SERVE and OBEY HIM ver 14. which KINGDOM is thrice explained afterwards as ver 18. These foure BEASTS saith the Angell are foure KINGS which shall arise But viz. when they have finished their course the Saints of the most High shal take THE KINGDOME Againe verse 22. The wicked Horne prevailed UNTILL THE TIME CAME THAT THE SAINTS POSSESSED THE KINGDOME Againe verse 27. when the fourth Beast reigning in the wicked Horne was DESTROYED THE KINGDOME and DOMINION and the GREATNES OF THE KINGDOME UNDER THE WHOLE HEAVEN SHALL BE GIVEN TO THE PEOPLE OF THE SAINTS OF THE MOST HIGH c. These grounds being laid I argue as followeth The Kingdom of the son of man and of the Saints of the most high in Daniel begins when the great Judgement sits But the Kingdome in the Apocalyps wherein the Saints reign with Christ a thousand yeares is the same with the Kingdome of the sonne of man and Saints of the most high in Daniel Therefore it also begins at the great Judgement * Mr. Mede saith not at the ultimate generall Judgement but at the great Iudgement speaking as Daniel and other Scriptures aforesaid and the Hebrew Rabbins calling al the thousand years the great judgement And the begâ—nning of them the beginning of the day of judgement See after at the next ☞ That the Kingdome in Daniel and that of the thousand years in the Apocalyps are one and the same Kingdome appears thus First Because they begin ab eodem termino from the same terme at the destruction of the fourth Beast That in Daniel when the Beast then ruling in the wicked horne was slaine and his body destroyed and given to the burning flame Dan. 7 ver 11.22.27 That in the Apocalyps when the Beast and false Prophet the wicked horne in Daniel were taken and both cast alive into a lake of fire burning with brimstone Apocal. 19.20 21. Secondly Because Saint John begins the Regnum of the thousand yeares from the same session of judgement described in Daniel as appeares by his parallell expressions borrowed from thence Daniel sayes chap. 7. Ver. 9. I beheld till the Thrones were pitched downe and the Judgement i. e. judices the Judges set Vers 22. And judgement was given to the Saints of the most high St. John sayes chap. 20. Vers 4. I saw thrones and they sate upon them And the Saints possessed the Kingdome viz. with the Sonne of Man who came in the cloudes And judgement was given unto them And the Saints lived and reigned with Christ a thousand years Now if this be sufficiently proved that the thousand years begin with the day of judgement ☜ it will appear further out of the Apocalyps that the Judgement is not CONSUMMATE TILL THEY BE ENDED For Gog and Magogs destruction and the UNIVERSALL RESURRECTION is not till then Therefore THE WHOLE THOUSAND YEARES IS INCLUDED IN THE DAY OF JUDGEMENT Hence it will follow that whatsoever Scripture speakes of a Kingdome of Christ to be at his second appearing or at the destruction of Antichrist must needs be the same which Daniel saw should be at that time and so consequently be the Kingdome of the thousand years which the Apocalyps includes between the beginning and consummation of the great Judgement Therefore that in Luk. 17. vers 20. to the end where the Pharisees demand of Christ when the Kingdome of God should appeare And Christ answers that it comes not with observation but as the lightning that lightneth out of the one part under heaven shineth unto the other c.
And that in Luk. 19. vers 11. c. to 15. He spake a parable because he was nigh to Jerusalem and because they thought that the Kingdom of God should immediately appeare c. And that in Luk. 21. ver 31. When you see these things come to passe know that the Kingdom of God is at hand See what went afore viz. The Sonne of Mans coming in a cloud with power and great glory borrowed from Daniel And that in 2 Tim. 4.1 I charge thee before God and the Lord Jesus Christ who shall judge the quicke and dead at his appearing and his Kingdom must signifie the same Kingdome that Daniel saw should be at the destruction of Antichrist and consequently the Kingdome of a thousand years which the Apocalyps includes between the beginning and the consummation of the great Judgement By these we may understand the rest Taking this for a sure ground That this expression of the Sonne of Mans coming in the cloudes of Heaven so often inculcated in the New Testament is taken from and hath referrence to the prophesie of Daniel being no where else found in the Old Testament As our Saviour also cals himselfe so frequently The Son of Man because Daniel so called him in that Vision of the great Judgement and that we might look for the accomplishment of what is there prophesied of in him It was not in vaine that when our Saviour quoted the prophesie of Daniel hee added He that readeth let him understand * Matth. 24. ver 15. Certainly the great Mystery of Christ is cheifly and most distinctly revealed in that Booke § 1 Thus out of my great respect to Mr. Medes learning having given him the precedency to speak first I shall limp after and stammer forth my own Notions such as they are § 2 In the second verse out of the strivings of the blustering spirits of ## the inhabitants of the foure quarters of the World in a Sea of Warres there ariseth a succession of foure Monarchies each in his turn ruling the greatest part of the whole earth This order or series of the foure Monarchies began with Nimrod about the year of the world one thousand seven hundred and eighty eight and afore Christ two thousand one hundred and eighty three and hath continued to this day This succession order or series of the foure Monarchies the Prophet according to his vision sets forth in the third verse under the name and notion of foure Beasts Which he explaines in the seventeenth verse to signifie four Kings or Monarches that should arise out of the earth that is by earthly means domineer over the greatest part of the earth § 3 The first Beast ver 4. is like a Lyon that had Eagles wings wherewith he was wont to lift up himselfe from the earth till they were plucked and then he was made to stand upon his feet as a man resting upon the earth and a mans heart was given unto him By all which is meant the Babylonian Monarchy which was strong like a Lyon and had wings of celerity and victory becoming the Assyrio-Chaidean Monarchy whereby it was lifted up to an Imperiall eminency above the generality of all the earth Obadiah ver 4. Jer. chap. 4. ver 13. Those his wings are plucked by Darius the Mede and Cyrus the Persian and so made to stand as a man upon his feet that is was brought down to the common rank of men And hath a mans heart given unto him that is the spirit of an ordinary man an ordinary low boates peasants plebeian spirit not an Heroick and Imperiall § 4 The second Beast vers 5. is like a Beare that raised up it selfe on one side and had three ribs in its mouth between its teeth and they said thus unto it Arise and devoure much flesh By all which is meant the Persian Monarchy which was ravenously cruell like a Bear raising up one dominion induring no Mate or Corrivall but subdued first the Medes then the Babylonians uniting all into one Monarchy Between the teeth of his mouth of his desires and power demanding and snatching more dominion he hath the three ribs of the Easterne Westerne and Southerne parts of the world by conquest compare Dan. 8.4 He ariseth and eateth much flesh in his cruell slaughterings and spoilings in pursuance of his Victories § 5 The third Beast ver 6. is like a Leopard which had upon the back of it foure wings of a fowle and had also foure heads and dominion was given to it By which is signified the Grecian Monarchy which was like a Leopard in subtilty celerity and rapacity Jer. 5.6 Hab. 1.8 Dan. 8.5 The Subtilty appeared in the policy of Philip the Father and Alexander the Sonne in laying the plot for this Monarchy slyly occasioning a quarrell to fall out with the neighbour Nations And in the cunning of Alexander in battell that would alwayes fight his supernumerous Enemy in straites where his said enemy might not have roome to bring up more of his men in fight then Alexander on his part could display in battell The swift celerity appeared in that the Grecians under the said Alexander did so suddenly within about twelve years over-run the greatest part of the world as if this Conquerour had flowne upon wings of whom the proverb was He came he saw he overcame And is therefore described in Dan. 8. by an Hee-Goate which skips as if he touched not the ground The rapacity or ravenousnesse to devoure appeared especially against the Jewes the foure heads of this Leopard and their Successors exercising matchlesse cruelty against them and every where as naturally ravenous more tearing and destroying then taking prey For Alexander and the Empire under him being the Body his four Captaines that immediately succeeded him in the Empire were the foure Heads or Rulers Dan. 8.8 and 11.4 Cassander head of Macedonia Antigonus of Asia Seleucus of Syria and Ptolomy of Egypt all possessing Imperiall dignity at once By which this Monarchy became a Monster and monstrous in devouring § 6 The fourth Beast verse 7. is so variously monstrous and strangely different that no naturall Beast nor Name is found meet to describe him onely he is said to have ten hornes and iron teeth to devour and feet to stamp the residue of the beasts under it A strange beast different from all Beasts and all the Beasts but compounded as John shewes Rev. 13. of all foure By this description of Daniel is set forth the Roman Monarchy which according to Daniels words was dreadfull and terrible to all Nations being exceeding strong to annoy them all having such teeth of warre as Scipio Pompey Caesar c. iron victors That addition of nailes of brasse ver 19. signifies their Imperiall Senate and Provinciall Magistrates who held fast whatsoever the iron teeth conquered The ten Hornes are explained by Saint John Rev. 17. to be the character of the Roman Empire and to signifie the ten Kingdomes into which at last it
sate upon the throne to receive the Booke And he is also said to be brought before the ancient of dayes which words saith Mr. Parker untill better light may shine I cannot but conjecture saith he that they doe signifie the Saints who bring Christ neare to the ancient of dayes BY IMPORTVNITY OF PRAYERS for the obtaining of the Kingdome and removall of it from the Beast Whereupon the Kingdome with all the dominion and glory thereof following in ver 14. to the end of the chapter is given to him that is to Christ and his Saints as afore cleared The beginning whereof saith Mr. Parker is at the fall of Antichrist and the setting up of the Throne of Judgement as appeareth vers 21 22 23.25 26. and is absolved in heavenly perfection at the Resurrection immediatly ensuing So he The greatnesse of it is in those words that All People Nations and Languages should serve him signifying that it is the very same Kingdome or Monarchy in place and substance only the quality shall be better and the quantity bigger these words holding forth saith Mr. Parker the universall conversion of the remnant of the earth who at the fall of Antichrist shall be subject to Christ and his Ordinances in the hand of his holy people the witnesses of truth for which cause they are also said to be subject to them v. 26 27. Isa 60.10 12. All that shall withdraw their â—ecks from such subjection shall be destroyed ☞ And this is the first state or rising of New Jerusalem the space of five and forty yeares before its compleating in the resurrection which state is specially described by all the Prophets The description of the continuance of this Kingdom of Christ is that it shall be for ever as hath been afore largely opened § 15 From the whole visionall representation and propheticall Nartative in this chapter Mr. Archers short argument I may call it in matter is considerable especially if put into forme thus Christ the Son of Man must have a Monarchy on earth delivered to him by God the Ancient of daies at the ruine of the fourth Monarchy to bee in his occupation at his second appearance and from thence to the end of the world But this cannot be meant of his spirituall and providentiall Kingdome which he had before the foure Monarchies 1 Cor. 10.1 c. as after the end of this world at the period of the thousand yeares he hath no Kingdom but resignes up all to the Father 1 Cor. 15.24 28. Therefore this is yet to come the fourth Monarchy being not yet destroyed nor Antichrist the main and most part of that fourth Monarchy § 16 Adde for a close of all we shall say upon this seventh of Daniel the resolution and reasons of learned Master Huet upon the scope thereof This Kingdome saith he * Huet on Daniel chap. 7. ver 14. is ascribed to the person of the Messiah which in ver 22.27 is given to and possessed by the Saints It is Christs authoritatively it is the Saints by delegation and ministry And such as rule for God and according to God are said to rule with God Hos 11 12. Rev. 2.26 27. which Kingdome of our Lord is either meerly spirituall and inward whereof he maketh no VICAR saving his holy Spirit and this Regency he reserveth with himselfe as a peculiar Royalty or else outward and mixt partly spirituall in the Ordinances of Worship and partly civill in Equity and Justice according to righteous lawes c. This admits of Deputation And the exercise of it may be ascribed either to God or Man the first and second causes never jarring This is that dominion here mentioned whereof the Iews are deprived by the tyranny of the Roman Monarchy Yet now through the glorious appearance of the Deliverer it is restored to them againe never more to be wrested from them This interpretation the circumstances of the Text confirme 1. It is such a regiment as was resisted by that very People Languages and Nations that after were brought in to serve and obey it upon the violent breaking to peeces of all that perseveringly resisted it But thus the spiritual Kingdome of Christ is not set up Ergo. 2. This Kingdom is such as may admit of humane deputation viz. that may be exercised by the Saints on earth ver 22. Judgement was given to the Saints of the most high and the Saints possessed the Kingdom But Christs spiritual Kingdom admits of no deputation seeing none among men can give the Spirit command the Conscience or move the Will but Christ alone So he I will adde a word and I have done with this Scripture and that may be a third Argument The dominion here prophesied and promised is that which was taken from the Jewes 1. By the Babylonian captivity wherein Daniel and the Jewes now were and in a way of comforting him and them against this their present desolate condition these visions and predictions are given to him and upon his sadnesse at first dark sight of them frequently mentioned in this booke they are further explained to him See more in an exact consideration of the whole ninth chapter of this prophesie 2. By the desolations of Jerusalem And accordingly Daniel sadly complaines in prayer to God in chap. 9. ver 12. That under the whole Heaven hath not been done as hath been done unto Jerusalem And for his comfort it is answered vers 24. That there were but seventy weekes to be determined upon the holy City which now hee understood ver 1.2 that they were neare expiration 3. By the ceasing of the daily sacrifice which is expresly mentioned chap. 12.11 as from thence to begin the account of one thousand two hundred and ninety yeares at the expiration whereof their full deliverance should commence Now observe That therefore the dominion passing away from the Jewes 1. passed away by Temporall calamities as in the captivity and the desolations of Jerusalem 2. By the interruption of outward publicke worship But the spirituall Kingdome of Christ he ruling their hearts by his Spirit and they worshipping him in secret with spirituall worship cannot passe away from a people by those two things But contrariwise as the Jewes were a religious people and the onely Church of Christ many years after the captivity yea and some hundreds of years after their returne till the Apostles times so the Christian Church was most flourishing spiritually when outwardly most persecuted under the ten persecutions and were faine to serve God in secret at dead midnight Compare the story of the Acts with Rev. 11.1 c. and Rev. 12.1 c. Fox Martyrolog Volum 1. all which relate to those times as Mr. Fox in his Book of Martyrs gives us a particular account SECT XXXVII Wherein Daniel chap. 11. and chap. 12. are collated so far as they assert our maine Thesis touching the GENERALL AND GLORIOUS RESTAURATION OF THE CHURCH AND RESTITUTION OF ALL THINGS § 1 THat I may
of the family of Ahab his predecessor King of Israel in Jezreel the royall City where the Kings of Israel dwelt § 4 The number of these ten Tribes that are to come in to make up the glorious Church on their part in the last times must not saith our Text be a small number a picking or gleaning of a few here and there but must be a most mighty multitude even as the sand of the Sea that cannot bee measured or numbered A mighty expression § 5 The state to which these Israelites shall be restored shall not onely be a goodly temporall estate in their owne Land as it is intimated in the next verse viz. the eleventh but unto a gracious spirituall state of conversion this being the introduction to that so that they shall be truely called Gods people and the Sonnes of the living God though before they were said not to be his people § 6 The height that this shall amount to is this in these steps That these ten Tribes of Israel being converted they with the two Tribes called Judah shall First Be gathered together Secondly Appoint themselves one Head in common over them all Thirdly Shall come up out of the Land Hebrew 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 up out of the earth or from the earth where ever they were scattered Fourthly It must be to returne into their owne land even to Jezreel c. named in the Text. To which two last steps Vatablus notes well 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 From the earth saith he that is from under captivity that is they shall be delivered from under captivity For they that returned from captivity were said to ascend up out of the earth or land of their capivity Oecolampadius also saith that from the land or earth signifies from that dispersion 1 Pet. 1.1 § 7 This HEAD they shall appoint over both is variously expounded the most are lead away by the aptnesse of the terme and truth of the thing in some sence that Christ is here meant to be the Head But whether this be the sence of the Prophet I doubt partly because by the order of the Text they had Christ for their spirituall head afore being by his means Act. 4.12 Joh. 1.12 made the sonnes of God partly because this Head is but to lead them up from their dispersion in opposition to the way-laying Turke that they may come into their owne Country there to sit downe under Christs Regiment in his visible Kingdome In which expedition whether Christ will be a personally visable or a visible personall conductor I doe not know If he would I am apt to thinke that the struggle against the Jewes enemies the Turke c. need not be so long as five and forty yeares according to Daniel 12.11 12. The Chalde paraphrase saith that this Head shall be 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 one Prince or Cheifetain of the house of David R. Jarchi saith David likely to the same sence as the Chalde Grotius saith Zorobabel And Aben Ezra names another And Alapide another And our new Annotations doe not speake absolutely that only Christ is here meant but cautiously thus one Head of the house of David Hereby is PRINCIPALLY meant the Messiah Christ the Head of the Church So they Now it is a true rule subordinata non sunt contraria I confesse seeing after their call to the faith for till then they stirre not they gather together and they appoint and this for their orderly and safe returne I can thinke no other to be here meant then some worthy fit man to be their Commander in cheife At the sound of the seventh Trumpet Christ takes his Kingdome Revel 11.15 The last wrastling of the Church against their enemies to ruine them is it seems to me in the latter end of the sixth Trumpet Rev. 11.13 And just so is the order of the Vialls Rev. 16. viz. to destroy the Beast see the exposition Rev. 17.1 and chap. 18. and chap. 19. And then Satan is bound and the Saints reigne with Christ chap. 23. As for Christs spirituall headship it doth as well make other places great in the day of their call as it doth Jezreel Of which next § 8 The eminency of this expedition is that great shall be the day of Jezreel which is brought in as a reason and proofe Heb. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Chalde 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Sept. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Latines all suitable quia BECAUSE great shall be the day of Jezreel That is whereas saith God I took away the Kingdome of Israel for the blood shed in Jezreel 1. Of the blood of Naboth by Jezabel 2. Of the blood of Jezabel by Jehu he doing it extrajudicially for his owne ends to establish the Kingdome to himselfe and set up or at least continue Idolatry not for Gods ends to rule for him and set up Reformation now great shall be the day of delivering Jezreel that is of Israel both by a Synechdoche a part for the whole Jezreel being the royall City of Israel as also by the notation of the word Jezreel which Jerom interprets the seed of God for such the Israelites shall be through Christ his sonne at their great call And others interpret the sowing or scattering of God to which our new Annotations incline and so Jezreel shall be Israel viz. they having been sowne or scattered into all Countryes as seed into so many fields should be brought together in the granary of their owne Country as seed growne up to ripe corne at the time of Harvest And so the Chalde renders it Great shall be the day of their gathering together For Israel of a Jezreel a scattering shall againe be an Israel a Prevailer with God I omit many other notations of the name Jezreel as rather pursuing matter and that which is most pertinent § 9 The Text is now ready for inferences but onely I would interpose the thoughts of a late learned writer upon this place as glad of his company as far as he goes my way It is Dr. Mayer Who having quoted divers Authours as Austine Hierome Lyra Calvin and Gualter varying more or lesse from the literall sence turns against them all upon sound reason thus I see no reason saith he why by Jezreel may not be understood the Kingdome of the Ten Tribes and their day of conversion said to be a great day seeing the first son of Hosea by his wife had his name Jezreel that herein he might figure out this Kingdome which thought it selfe strong but for sinne was adjudged to dissipation yet being by Gods mercy gathered together againe with Judah under the Gospell Israel should be as famous and honourable as before miserable and infamous and the day when this should be done should be counted a great day of Jezreel formerly so called in derision but now seriously they coming to be the seed of God as it is expressely faid they shall be called the Sons of the living God and therefore I rest in this
fulfilled it therefore he never would or could fulfill it for future which reason I leave with the unprejudicated reason of the Reader Quem penes arbitrium est vis norma loquendi Our late new Annotationists say upon the fourteenth verse I will bring againe the captivity of Israel c. that A new face o◠ALL THINGS shall then appeare when God shall shew his chearfull face upon his people The full accomplishment hereof is under Christ when they are planted in his Church out of which they can never be pulled after they are once graffed therein Let the Reader here have one eie upon these words to this day spoken in the future Tense and the other on the present State of Judah and Israel on whom this prophesie is not according to the expressions of our Annotationists yet fulfilled And Dr. Mayer confesseth that this prophesie cannot be restrained to that deliverance out of Babylon because though they built in their owne land after this yet they continued not alwaies there but were afterwards expelled again by the Romans § 2 Next to tell you my notions upon this prophesie before the former Authors either were extant or consulted observe first that as wel the ten Tribes as the two Tribes must be here meant to share in this deliverance being mentioned in the termes DAVID who reigned the latter part of his life over all the twelve Tribes and ISRAEL which by Gods assignation was the name of Jacob the father of all the twelve Heads of the twelve Tribes and by proper acception after the division of the Kingdome was the name of that part which contained the ten Tribes Both which parts viz. Judah and Israel are the more necessarily conjoyned in this deliverance because Jerusalem though in the Kingdome of Judah was the publicke place of the Churches meeting and of their solemne divine worship in common and joyntly to all twelve Tribes and this Prophet Amos doth expressely prophesie to the Tribes of Israel chap. 1. ver 1. The words of Amos which he saw concerning ISRAEL The prophet there sufficiently hinting to us in the words following that he did well remember the distinction of Judah and Israel for it followes that Amos saw those words concerning ISRAEL in the daies of Uzziah King of JUDAH and in the daies of Jeroboam the sonne of Joash King of ISRAEL § 3 Next observe that in this deliverance all the twelve Tribes for the generality and the fulnesse of the Gentiles must be conjoyned in a religious Church union and divine Gospel-worship So in ver 12. The Lord having said in ver 11. I will raise up the Tabernacle of David c. He addes in the twelfth verse that they the said Jews may possesse the remnant of Edom and of ALL THE HEATHEN which are CALLED BY MY NAME Which Saint James Act. 15.13 c. to ver 18. doth sully and effectually apply to that sence and end James answered saying men and brethren hearken unto me Simeon hath declared how God at the first did VISIT THE GENTILES to take out of THEM a people for his name and to this agree the words of the Prophet as it is written after this I will return and WILL BUILD AGAIN THE TABERNACLE OF DAVID and will build again the ruines thereof and will set it up THAT THE RESIDUE OF MEN MIGHT SEEK AFTER THE LORD and AL THE GENTILES UPON WHOM MY NAME IS CALLED c. in which quotation St. James minding the sence of the Prophet rather then his words and what the Apostle spake at large and most likely in his native Hebrewish language Saint Luke giving us but the sum and in the Greek tongue following also for the most the Septuagints version of the Prophet that speech and translation being then most common over the world by reason of the late Grecian Monarchy over-spread so wide for neare two hundred and eighty years expiring not till about forty six yeares afore Christ some smal differences there may haply be in terms and reading from both the Hebrew and the Septuagint But none at all in the main intent and meaning For the prophet saying that THEY the Jews may possesse the remnant of EDOM WHICH are called by my name Hebr. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which may conveniently be rendred by whom my name is called upon even by them this WHICH Hebrew 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 being of all Numbers and Genders as our English which may either relate to that same THEY that is Judah and Israel who shall possesse the remnant of Edom and all the Heathen shall be called by my name i.e. The said Jewes being converted unto the Gospell shall thereupon be called Christians and my people and so called by my name And calling upon God in faith shall thereby be said to call upon Gods name or to be those in or by whom the name of God is called upon Or else this WHICH may be referred to the remnant of the EDOMITES and of all the HEATHEN that they so many of them as shall be converted and truly professing godlinesse shall thereupon be called Gods people to wit Godly or Christs people that is Christians and so called by his name And calling upon God with faith in prayer they shall be those in or by whom the name of God shall be called upon even in them or among them Now which way soever wee referre it it comes all to one maine sence intent and purpose viz. That upon the eversion of the incurable enemies of Christ followes the conversion of them that submit to Christ whether they bee the Jewes the possessors of the remnant of Edom and of all the Heathen or the Gentiles the possessed to wit the remnant of Edom and of all the Heathen Both which being converted shall incorporate into one Church and way of worship If any Reader be contented with this composal of these seeming differences he may jump over the next sectiuncle viz. § 4. § 4 If others will not be satisfied without a more particular parallel and reconciliation of those three viz. the Hebrew the Septuagint Greeke and the New-Testament Greeke the two former in this place of Amos the last in Act. 15.17 then thus if they will have patience to hear me to the end The divers readings Hebrew Amos 9.12 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is that they may possesse or inherit the remnant of Edom. Septuag Amos 9.12 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. that is That the remnant of men may seek after The New Testam Act. 15.17 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is That the remnant of men may seeke or seeke after the Lord. Thus you have an exact true Scheme of the divers readings which is a little mistakingly set downe in Mr. Medes Diatr par 4. p. 525. For there is no copie of the Septuagints or variae lectiones of them on Amos 9.12 that I know of although I have divers that have in them 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or 〈◊〉 〈◊〉
holinesse and the HOUSE OF JACOB shal possess their possessions And the HOUSE OF JACOB shall be a fire and the house of JOSEPH a flame and the house of Esau for stubble and they shall kindle in them and devoure them And they of the South shall possesse the mount of Esau and they of the plaine the Philistims and they shall possess the fields of Ephraim and the fields of SAMARIA and Benjamin shall possess Gilead And the Captivity of this Host of the children of ISRAEL shall possess that of the Canaanites even unto Zarephath and the captivity of JERUSALEM which is in Sepharad shall possess the Cities of the South And Saviours shall come upon mount Zion to judge the mount of Esau and the Kingdomes shall be the Lords In which words we have such a character of the future happy state of the Church on earth harmoniously and beautifully wreathed and inter-woven of Jewes and Gentiles converted unto Christ as yet never was but still lies upon the engagement of Gods infallible truth to be fulfilled For on the Gentiles part here expressed under so many names they are not all to be destroyed but possessed with a mixed cohabitation of Jews according to the aforesaid place of Amos with which is our present collation this of Obadiah that there shall bee a REMNANT of Edom and a REMNANT for so the grammer of the word carries it of all the Heathen among whom and by whom the name of God shall be called upon And on the Jewes part both the Kingdome of Judah now as Judah and Benjamin are called 1 King 11.13 and ch 12.20 because of the mixture of their territories as the Geneva notes well give the reason and also the Kingdome of Israel must bee here understood as sharers in the spirituall salvation and outward happinesse here so laboriously inculcated else why doth the Prophet use one while such comprehensions in words as the house of Jacob and that twise and the house of Joseph Another while such distinctions and discriminations in terms as the captivity of the host of the CHILDREN OF ISRAEL and the captivity of JERUSALEM plainly enough setting forth the two Tribes the ten Tribes and generally the learned agree that both are here understood though severally they fix the footing of their interpretations Oecolampadius saith on ver 20. Duplices facit captivitates c. that is the Prophet makes two captivities For he gives to Israel the space towards the North and then he gives to them that were of Jerusalem that is to the Tribe of Judah and Benjamin that tract which is towards Egypt Mercer hath it over and over that in the 19. verse of this Obadiah is touched the State of Judah and in the 20 verse the State of Israel Hierom saith the house of Jacob signifies Judah and the house of Joseph the ten Tribes And Ephraim the son of Joseph out of which Tribe was the Regality of Samaria intimates that the two Kingdoms were to be again coupled or re-united for the devastation of the Edomites that is as t is generally agreed among the learned both Jewes and Christians those that are incorrigible Antichristian enemies of the Kingdom of the Lord Jesus And then that which is added in the close as the corenis of this glorious internal and externall salvation of all these to be saved that Saviours in the plurall shall come upon mount Zion to judge the enemies and the Kingdome shall be the Lords is of that strength and torrent that it bears downe afore it all limitations of the meaning to their return from Babylon or the incarnation of THE SAVIOUR CHRIST whose then was the Kingdome in kind no otherwise then it was formerly when he ruled the world by his power and his Church by his Word and Spirit whereas this close THE Kingdome shall be the Lords must intend that it shall be answerable to the description from the seventeenth verse downward viz. a most holy Kingdome and withall a most visible outwardly large and glorious Kingdome and that on earth all corporall incurable Antichristian enemies sensibly falling before it Which is not only my opinion and sence of these words Mercer presents to us Ex Lyr. commenting on this Prophet thus much Odium Esau in Jacob in semine perseveravit c. that is the hatred of Esau against Iacob continued in the very seed therefore the overthrow of them is foretold Isa 21.34 Ier. 49. Ezek. 35. Amos 1. Mal. 1. This Prophet doth excellently handle and is wholly in this That as Christ is the Son of Abraham and of Israel and that after the flesh and therefore all indued with the spirit are his Brethren and belong to the seed of Abraham and of Israel so all false brethren that is ANTICHRISTS and Hypocrites belong to the seed of Esau Unto these agrees and suites whatsoever thou here readest against the Edomites Obadiahs Prophecy is smal in bulk great in sence comprehending many things in a few words He prophesieth in the behalfe of Israel against Edom prophesying the subversion of the Edomites and the GLORY of the true Israel the Church of Christ and that he alone shall reigne He saith that on mount Sion shall be deliverance and salvation which are more perfectly fulfilled according to the letter in the Church collected of all the faithfull then in mount Zion because the state of mount Zion continued but for a time but the Church abides for ever which shall be wee are confident more eminently famous in the very land of Israel when Israel in the LAST TIME SHAL RECEIVE CHRIST And their possessing their possessions or that they shall possess those that possessed them as he renders it shall he saith come to passe with illustrious glory after the LAST CONVERSION OF ISRAEL It is some-how fulfilled daily in the Elect overcoming their enemies with invincible patience But it is to be fulfilled more sublimely and gloriously in the judgement when the wicked shal openly before all be judged of the Elect. In speciall the house of Joseph is named albeit it is contained under the house of Iacob least for their worshipping of Calves and their long captivity it should be deemed as rejected Ioseph and Ephraim of which Tribe was Ieroboam are the ten Tribes whose captivity say the Hebrewes is not yet discharged But as it is said in the end of the Prophet Amos in the LAST TIME ISRAEL SHALL BE CONVERTED There are they which by Esau understand the Gentiles and by Israel the faithfull whom I contradict not There were of the Tribe of Iudah and Benjamin among the Apostles But who of the Tribe of Ephraim and Ioseph were among them is uncertaine But they on whom this Prophesie must be fulfilled must be of all Israel converted and the house of Iacob shall be a fire Who can deny this yet to bee fulfilled hereafter Apparently it shall be fulfilled when the world shall be judged For t is impossible that this should be fulfilled seeing as
it is here said For the Lord hath spoken it ZAREPHA which others write Sarephta and SEPARAD R. Sel. interprets to bee France and Spaine But out of all such speeches as the Prophet here useth this may safely be collected that because those Nations are here named which most infested the Israelites namely the Canaanites Philistims and Edomites that all enemies of the faithfull are here to be understood which haply is to be fulfilled according to the letter ISRAEL being converted in the last times so that ALL ISRAEL being converted in ALL LANDS they all are to be accounted for the Inheritance of Israel Thus far he Oecolampadius likewise In Monte Sion erit evasio id est salus c. That is on mount Sion shall be deliverance that is salvation or safety T is certain the Apostles by the sending of the spirit upon mount Sion and others conjoyned to the Church were delivered by Christ at his first coming and so we beleeve that at this day every Congregation of the faithfull is delivered But we expect a more ample felicity when the Lord shal come again c. In the last times we expect perfecter sanctity and these of the house of Jacob shall be Lords of those who before oppressed them We find not in History that many of the Jews did bear rule in those Countries save only that the Maccabees seized upon certaine Towns BUT THOSE THINGS DO NOT SEEM TO SATISFIE THE PROPHETICAL MAJESTIE * Majestati ropheticae In the last times that is when Christ shall come we shall see the Apostles and those that have imitated them to be Iudges of the whole Earth albeit at this day the Elect are divers waies afflicted by the Antichristian party yet it shall come to passe that they shall be LORDS OVER OTHERS c. I am not ignorant that some agreeing with the Jewes doe thinke that before the day of Christ this KINGDOM SHALL BE ON EARTH Christ did not tell his Disciples this therefore let not us be solicitous of this thing No farther shone the the dimme light of Oecolampadius touching this truth in those ancient darker times Yet hear him presently almost in the next words how hee doth in the generall grant this truth as a truth worthy to be known on those words And the house of Jacob shall be a fire c. he saith By the people of Esau we saith Oecolampadius understand the enemies of the truth who shall be before it as stubble to the fire which began in the preaching of the Apostles overthrowing idolatry c. But in the day of judgement when hereafter they shall with Christ pronounce sentence and condemne them they shall perish by the word of God c. However the Jewes expound it either of times afore or after the returne from Bâ—hell yet still they have been adversaries all eit they speak of an HAPPY AGE FOR A THOUSAND YEARS Some doe thinke that the just or righteous Jewes shall rise and dwell upon the earth but I leave that as uncertaine But MOST CERTAINE IT IS that this Prophet doth promise to the people of God in these words A MOST PERFECT FELICITY Among the Edomites shall be no felicity c. In these verses therefore he teacheth that the KINGDOME OF CHRIST SHAL BE MOST AMPLE AND LARGE and not concluded in so strait a corner as formerly c. And upon the twentieth and one and twentieth ver Oecolampadius concludes thus The Jews say that Canaan signifies all Germanie unto France and that Sepharat signifies Spaine which things are uncertaine by this description of places But certainly ALL ISRAEL shall be saved ' All which things I plainly referre to the last day Now compare Oecolampadius with Oecolampadius and see whether he doth not in the generall grant the point in hand and grant it as a thing certaine and to be hoped for Thus for the parallel with Obadiah § 6 The next thing to be considered on this place of Amos now under our hands is the time when this must bee mainly fulfilled viz. At that day saith our Prophet ver 11. that is at some notable day namely when as in ver 9. God hath sifted the house of ISRAEL in all Nations like as corne is sifted with a sieve yet not the least graine fals on the earth that is the wheat of converted Israel for the generall shall be gathered from the chaffe of the obstinate in all nations But alas Judah and Israel all of them for the generality are yet in their chaffe of non-conversion and in the straw of all Nations § 7 The last thing to be considered on this nineth of Amos is the manner of their state when delivered viz. All ruines must bere-built and all breaches closed up they must call upon God as God may own them for callers upon his name There must be as all spirituall so all outward prosperity for the sanctified use of the Church in a goodly succession of seasons for that end expressed under the notions of the Plowmans overtaking the reaper the mountaines dropping sweet wine c. All their injoyments must be perpetuated so as they must never bee pulled up out of their own Land § 8 Now laying all particulars of this Text together let all the men and bookes in the world shew us when Judah and Israel were ever thus delivered since their captivity and put into this spirituall and temporall happy condition in a religious conjunction with the Gentiles to the worlds end and this must be before the ultimate generall Judgement as the circumstances of the place importune and necessitate us to expect Therefore this Prophesie of Amos is yet to be fulfilled Thus of Amos. SECT XLIII § 1 NExt we come to the Prophet MICAH wherein we shall consider onely one place viz. chap. 4. throughout Of which note this in generall 1. That this prophesie of Michaiah is as well concerning Samaria the Metropolis of the ten Tribes as concerning Jerusalem the metropolis of the two Tribes chap. 1. ver 1. Secondly That this place was urged for our opinion before Jeroms time which was three hundred ninety yeares after Christ which Jerom confesseth in these words in Micheam 4. Sciendum quoque c. i.e. we must know saith he that this Chapter also and that like it out of Isaiah meaning Chap. 2. Ver. 2. c. is referred by the Jewes and the heires of their mistake to the Kingdom of Christ and his Saints for a thousand years Thus Jerom for whose jircking our opinion you shall see him anon jirck himself § 2 For particulars note in the first place the time of fulfilling this prophesie that we here alleadge Our last English Translation saith In the last daies The Hebrew speaks higher 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 which words differing in Gender and Number and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 properly signifying last cannot be closely construed to the Grammer of them but thus In the last of daies And so also Jerom renders it in
memorial in the temple of the Lord. 15. And they that ARE FAR OFF shall come and build in the temple of the Lord. Though this second Temple was long since founded and by this time in great part raised chap. 8. ver 9. and the carrying on of the work to a finishing by sufficient and able men was now in hand yet the Prophet here foretells that the man whose name is the BRANCH the usuall and frequent title of Christ shall BUILD the TEMPLE of the Lord in vers 12. And presently againe repeated with great Emphasis in ver 13. EVEN HEE shall build the temple of the Lord. And therefore the Prophet in these words looked far beyond his owne time Christ builds the Temple first in his natural body secondly in his mysticall subordinates are no opposites but doe ray forth a typicall radiation from the one successively to the other First In his natural body by his resurrection according to his owne exposition John 2.18 19 20. When his adversaries demanded of him What sign shewest thou unto us seeing thou dost these things Jesus answered destroy this Temple and in three daies I will raise it up Then said the Jewes forty and six years was this Temple in building and wilt thou rear it up in three daies But he spake of the Temple of his body Secondly In his Mysticall body the Church of beleevers By communicating unto whom his holy Spirit he makes them his Temple and the habitation of God 1 Cor. 6.15 16 17 18 19. And 2 Cor. 6.16 Eph. 2.21 22. This mysticall Temple was founded long since but the Prophet here points mainly to the finishing of it Or to speake in a juster proportion to the first and second materiall Temple The first mysticall Temple that is the Church of the Jewes being destroyed at Christs passion the vaile then being rent to signifie the tearing down of Jewish worship upon his ascension by sending the Spirit hee began the building of the second mysticall Temple viz. the Christian Church Act. 2. c. and throughout that booke But when this second mystical Temple shall be finished made up in its fulnesse Rom. 11.25 26. of which St. John mainly prophesies in his Revelation of which finishing Zecharie here in ver 15. gives us this signe That THEN they that ARE AFAR OFF shall come and build in the Temple Which can have no other adequate and more certaine interpretation then this that when the Gentiles that are afar off in Religion shall in full come in and the ten Tribes of Israel that are to this day afar off in place too shall come and be built into the Christian Church at that same THEN even at that very time the BRANCH Christ that built this second mysticall Temple shall SIT and RULE upon his THRONE and he shall be a Priest upon his Throne and the Counsil of Peace shall be between them both That is as Christ hath sensibly appeared in acting his Priesthood when hee paid and prayed for his Church at and afore his Passion * In the 17 18 and 19 chapters of John so shall he as manifestly be seen to act his Kingly-hood in a glorious universall evident peace flowing from both in the time of his Kingdome Else nothing is prophesied for meer inward spirituall peace into the hearts of the Saints had flowed in all ages of the Church afore from his Kingly and Priestly office precisely considered as spirituall and the Saints knew it upon much experience But here is prophesied such things and such effects as many of the Church could hardly beleeve And therefore there should be crownes to Helem and Tabijah and Jedajah and to Hen for a memoriall in the Temple i. e. They should be in Zecharies time hung up in the Temple to be a conviction and condemnation of them that beleeved not this Prophesie and to draw men unto faith to beleeve the same as Calvin Pemble and Junius expound it But these things were never yet fulfilled as History and experience shew And the last universall resurrection will be unseasonable and unsuitable Therefore it is yet to come SECT XLVII § I THe third place in Zecharie which we need but touch is in chap. 8. ver 20. c. to the end of the chapter Ver. 20. Thus saith the Lord of Hosts it shall yet come to passe that there shall come people * Heb. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Chal. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is Peoples Sept. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Many peoples And so t is expresse in v. 22. and the inhabitants of many Cities 21. And the Inhabitants of one City shall goe to another saying let us goe speedily to pray before the Lord and to seeke the Lord of Hosts I wil goe also 22. Yea many people and strong Nations shall come to seeke the Lord of Hosts in Jerusalem and to pray before the Lord. 23. Thus saith the Lord of Hosts in those daies it shall come to passe that ten men shal take hold out of all languages of the Nations even shall take hold of the skirt of him that is a Jew saying we wil goe with you for wee have heard that God is with you § 2 There is no more to be said to this so plaine a prophesie but this that we shall boldly assert that it was never yet fulfilled since the Jewes returne from captivity till men or bookes can shew us the contrary The Scriptures tels us no such thing History tels us no such thing experience shewes us no such matter as that peoples yea many peoples yea and strong Nations did ever joyne with the Jewes in religious worship as in prayer to God c. and that at Jerusalem As for those mentioned Act. 2.5 c. viz Parthians Medes Elamites c. They were neither Nations nor Gentiles but were some certaine Jewes who having been borne in those forenamed Countries did now for the present sojourne * So the word in the Text. from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 is used by the Septuagint which the Apostles and Evangelists much follow in their new Testament quotations Gen. 27.44 Son arise saith Rebecka to Jacob and flee unto Laban thy Brother to Haran and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and sojourne with him a few dayes 1 King 17.20 O Lord my God saith Elijah hast thou brought evill upon the widdow 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that is with whom I sojourne In which places the word is plainly taken for sojourning and accordingly circumscribed with a short time at Jerusalem for the businesse of worship at the feast of the Passeover and Pentecost Thus in this fifth verse they are expressely called Jews There were sojourning or abiding at Jerusalem JEWS of every Nation under Heaven Ver. 22. when Peter spake to them he saith to them Yee men of ISRAEL And that none put this off with an imagination that they were Proselytes that is Gentiles converted to Judaisme let them heed that Proselytes
the best antiquity that Cerinthus held no wanton voluptuous chiliasme nor spake he any thing at all of the Millenaries though Tertullian and Irenaeus lived above an hundred yeares nearer to Cerinthus his time then did Eusebius And therefore wise men cannot but wonder that Eusebius should tel us such stories And wonder the more because Epiphanius on the other side that gave himselfe ten times more to inquire into opinions then Eusebius flourishing about 30 years after Eusebius his death ⸪ Euseb dyed about the year 339. and Epith. flourished about the year 365. doth neither himselfe finde any such opinion held by Cerinthus or his Sect nor doth he mention it as reported by Eusebius or his Gaius or Dionysius or any other And thus praise to Jehovah of the places in the Old Testament CHAP. IV. Of the places in the New Testament proving our generall Thesis viz. That there shall be yet afore the ultimate generall Judgement a most glorious visible state of the Church on earth for many years wherein the Saints shall reigne and triumph over all their enemies and there shall be a Restitution of all things like as a new Creation SECT I. Of our New-Testament proofes we have occasionally opened so many and so much to explaine the Prophets that we have greatly anticipated our selves and happily made our worke so short in this that hence there is no feare of tediousnesse to the reader § 1 THe first place we shall touch upon in the New Testament for the glorious visible state of the Church on earth before the ultimate generall Judgement is in Matth. 24.13 14. But he that shall endure to the end shall be saved And this Gospel of the Kingdome shall be preached in all the world for a witnesse unto all Nations and then shall the end come That antitheticall BUT points at a time immediatly following the universall transcendent impieties of the wicked world mentioned vers 10 11 12. which by the Apostles in their Epistles * is oft prognosticated to be as the night 2 Thes 2.3 2 Tim. 4.1 1 Tim. 3.1 Compare 2 Tim. 4.1 2 Pet. 2.1 Compare 2 Pet. 3. ver 3 ver 12. preceding the Sun-rising of that glory of which we speake The end here mentioned must needs be the end of the world not of Jerusalem as we have before analitically demonstrated on this twenty fourth of Matthew p. 102. Sect. 9. And this end must be of the wicked world that is of the world as wicked not of the world as a world or materiall substance else why doth our Saviour mention enduring and of preaching the Gospel for a witnesse to all Nations For when the time of the aforesaid glorious state of the Church throughout the whole earth is come called the restitution of all things Acts 3.21 there will be no putting of men to be saved upon enduring or suffering they now are saved and glory hath dispelled suffering And consequently there will be no need of making the Gospel a testimony against all Nations to which at this time all that survive shal altogether submit as to all appearance The end therefore here intended is the end of the world as a sinfull world then to be turned into a glorious Kingdome as well as the world formed by the Gospel preached in all the world to all Nations to which at which time Christ shall gloriously appeare and radiat upon it on earth as we have largely demonstrated on the thirtieth verse c. of this twenty fourth of Matthew p. 82. Sect. 3. c. The signe immediately antecedent to this end to be transformed into that glorious beginning I say the signe prognostick or causal signe is the preaching of the Gospel in all the world to all Nations which is a glorious prelude This radiant Sun softning all good generous plants to a flowing of sap into the flowers of Gods Garden or fruit-trees of his Fortward though it hardens the dead earth into stones to be trampled and broken by the prancings of victorious judgements upon them as other Scriptures before opened abundantly enlarge § 2 That these things thus briefly hinted may duly be illustrated according to the just extent of the words under consideration let us make three observations upon them ¶ 1. That such an end must be here meant as cannot be applied to the destruction of Jerusalem but to the time immediatly before the end of the world because there was little or no salvation temporall or spirituall to them surviving at the destruction of Jerusalem and therefore our Saviour adviseth the Jewes in the sixteenth verse c. at this time to flye not to endure to the end of those troubles even as many yeares afore the Gospel was fled from Jerusalem Acts 8.1 c. and generally from the Jewes Acts 13.46 Rom. 11.25 even as they witnessed the said departure in their continuance in their Jewish sacrificing from Titus his destruction to Adrian and from him to Constantine and from thence to Iulian his time as we have oft before recited Besides the evils here set as markes of the end are the same the Apostles make of the approaching of the end of the world for which compare the ninth tenth eleventh and twelfth verses of this twenty fourth of Matthew with 2 Tim. 3.1 2 3 4. ¶ 2. The Gospel must be preached in all the World so as to be a witnesse to all Nations Gr. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The Gospell shall be preached IN all the INHABITED world for a witnesse to all the GENTILES A thing may be said to be proclaimed TO a whole towne if declared but in the Market place or to a whole Province or County when it is done in the chiefe City But this preaching must be in the whole inhabited world where-ever men inhabite as Jonah preached in every street of Nineveh labouring three dayes in that worke in that one City and this preaching must be such and so much as will justly amount to a witnesse to them viz. a witnesse to convince them beyond all excuse that the Gospel was preached to them ¶ 3. That it is here said THIS Gospel of the Kingdom 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 shal be preached in all the world so that by this emphaticall expression is given to us a cleare distinction betweene THIS Gospel and the THE Kingdom insomuch that Christs meer Spiritual Kingdome cannot be here understood The Gospel is the Law of the Kingdome the Saints are the Subjects or matter of that Kingdom the Gospell comes from Heaven the people of the Kingdome are 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 in the inhabited world converted by that Gospell out of all Nations as our Text holds forth The preaching of the Gospel is the antecedent sign of the coming and approaching of that Kingdome But the antecedent cannot be the consequent or the signe bee the thing signified nor can the cause be the effect Besides Christ saying he that indures to the end shal be saved is antithetically put
and for Christ that he hath appointed to them a kingdome yea HIS kingdom ver 29 30 with which let the studious reader diligently compare Revel 11.18 Rev. 20.4 which tribulations or temptations all Converts that live on earth to any maturity of age to professe their godlinesse in life and conversation doe more or lesse undergoe on earth Act. 14.22 And therefore it is here promised that they shall be rewarded on earth as we have and shall abundantly demonstrate But if there be no such estate to be fulfilled upon earth but only a state of glory in the supreamest Heaven then all the Elect dying in their infancy to whom also the Kingdom of Heaven belongs Mark 10.14 who never indured any temptations c. shall have as much priviledge viz. the fulnesse of ultimate glory as those that have indured most and longest in temptations which seems contrary to the Text which holds forth a peculiar eminent prerogative to them that indure temptation with and for Christ compare Rev. 20.4 ¶ 2. Christ appoints unto them a kingdome as his father appointed unto him a kingdome But the father appointed unto Christ no kingdome in ultimate glory in the supreamest heavens which as on all hands t is agreed followes the ultimate judgement for then and there Christ layes downe all his Kingdomship Kingship or reigning 1 Cor. 15.24 28. And it is most improper to say the Saints the Members reigne when and where the head Christ himselfe a◠Christ doth not reigne Besides reigning in and over a Kingdome implies by an inference from relations that some are subjects to them in that Kingdome being brought under subjection to them but in the highest heaven there is nothing made subject to them If the Angels ministration be not at an end when the Church is perfected in glory yet they are said only to be servants for the Church but not subject under the Church at their command being subject under Christ alone Heb. 1.6.13 14. But if Christ according to that fore-quoted place 1 Cor. 15.24.28 doth then lay downe all his power and authority we cannot understand how the service of Angels should be thence-forward continued but in the glorious estate on earth the Saints have all the Creatures and men that truly beleeve not subject to them according to the many Prophesies afore alleadged and opened As for the Spirituall Kingdome of Christ beleevers were in that in all ages by past and therefore that could not be the meaning of this Promise and Prophesie given forth by our Saviour in this text Besides the Spirituall kingdome of Christ is the kingdome of patience as Saint John often intimates where the Saints indure those temptations Christ mentions and so cannot signifie the kingdome of reward which Christ promiseth to that induring ¶ 3. Eating and drinking are unsuitable expressions to signifie supernall eternall ultimate glory but very suitable to expresse Christs glorious Kingdome ou earth yet to come as we have before opened * Book 2. ch 2. sect 5. p. 91. ¶ 4. By the order of the words the Saints must first be in the Kingdome and then sit on Thrones and judge the Tribes of Israel But in the Spirituall kingdome of Christ they had not so done nor doth Christs speech relate to past but future and in the supreamest ultimate glory there is nothing to be judged neither persons nor things ¶ 5. Christ promising emphatically that the Saints should sit on Thrones in HIS Kingdome cannot be applied to the supreamest ultimate glory in which Christ hath no Kingdome but layes downe all 1 Cor. 15.24 25. Therefore this Kingdome here meant is yet to come before the ultimate Judgement and the state of glory is to succeed that SECT V. The fifth place in the New Testament is Acts 1.6 7. When they were come together they asked of him saying Lord wilt thou at this time restore againe the Kingdome to Israel And he said unto them it is not for you to know or as it is in the Greek it is not of you to know the times or the seasons which the Father hath put in his owne power § 1 WHat formerly hath been spoken on this text by others see before in Page 33. § 3. where they assert that the Kingdome here enquired after signifies a Kingdome to be on earth after Christs resurrection afore the ultimate Judgement § 2 And see it plainly in the text that though Christs Spirituall kingdome in the height of it by John and Christs ministry in a New Testament exaltation had been now in being these four yeares past before the putting of the question in the text and the Apostles were fully informed of the state of ultimate glory by the tenor of all the Scriptures yet they expect another kingdome viz. one to be restored to ISRAEL yea to the TWELVE Tribes of Israel for as much as at present only the two Tribes were at and about Jerusalem and they under the power of the Romans the other ten being in captivity in forreigne Nations § 3 Note further that Christ doth not deny the thing but only the manifesting of it and at this time even as he speakes in the present tence IS not not it SHALL not § 4 And therefore the Apostles then present were not by this beaten off from expecting it but rather went on preaching it Acts 3.21 largely opened afore pag. 96. Sect. 7. pag. 165. ¶ 3. and 2 Pet. 3. discussed Book 3. chap. 2. sect 51. § 2. § 5 Yea in processe of time after Christs ascension Christ did fully reveale to John the Apostle in severall Visions the thing and the time thereof Revel 1.1 the particulars whereof wee have abundantly discussed upon several Chapters of that revelation * See before on Revel 20. in 1 Booke 3 chap. Sect. 1 2 3. 4th on Rev. 1. p. 80 c. on Rev. 5. p. 73 c on Rev. 7. p. 204. on Rev. 9. p. 49. 87. on Rev. 10. p. 67. 96. on chap. 11. p. 58. 72 91. on chap. 12. p. 94. on chap. 13. p. 87. on chap. 14. p. 67 73 74. on chap. 16. p. 309. on chap. 17. p. 88 c. on chap. 18. See Book 3. c. 2. S. 45. S. 3. P. 4. on chap. 19. See p. 62. 74. 89. 56. 58. on chap. 20. See again p. 116 c. p. 55 56. 66 c. 226. on chap. 21. See p. 116. on chap. 22. see p. 94. and see after in this third Book Chap. 4. Sect. 12. and shal more hereafter ** Lastly if Christ had here meant either his Spirituall kingdome or the kingdome of ultimate glory he would not have been shye to declare those unto them having been alwayes free to preach and manifest them from time to time to all his Disciples See John 14. c. to the end of the seventeenth Chapter and often elsewhere SECT VI. The sixth place in the New Testament is Rom. 11.25 26 27. vers
the Roman to bee the fourth Kingdome that so they might the better maintaine their expectation of the Messiah yet to come because that Kingdome was yet in being I say it was affirmed whosoever first affirmed it without all ground authority or probability the contrary also being easie to be proved viz. that the Jewes were of this opinion before our Saviours time as appears in Jonathan Ben Uziel the Chalde Paraphrast and by the fourth Book of Esdras which whatsoever the authority thereof be is sufficient to prove this being written by a Jew for it is saith Picus the first of their seventy Books of Cabala and before our Saviours comming as appears by many passages of Messiah expected and yet to appeare within foure hundred yeers after that supposed time of Esdras Certainly he that writ it meant no hurt to the Christians as will easily appear to him that reads it and finds the name Jesus and so often mention of the Sonne of God Which I note in case you should rather thinke it written after Christ The ancient mention thereof is by Clemens Alexandrinus Anno 200. CHAP. V. Of the Vote of Christians at least so named concerning the glorious state of things yet to be on earth afore the ultimate judgement Delivered not onely in short passages here and there sprinkled in their Works but in their great Councils and forms of Catechismes for the grounding of people in Religion § 1 TOuching the opinion of some learned Papists in the point now under consideration we gave you some instance afore in the first Book out of Lorinus a learned Papist his quotations of some of his owne Religion And out of learned A lapide though a ranke Papist confessing much of this point in his Commentary on Hos 3. v. 5. as his owne judgement quoting many Fathers c. to countenance his opinion therein adde now out of him on Hos 1. Chapter upon the tenth verse And the number of the children of Israel shall be as he sand of the sea which cannot be measured nor numbred he hath these words Dico ergo c. I say therefore saith A lapide this Prophesie began to be fulfilled by Christ who preached in person both to Jews and Israelites as Matth. 4 15. and after by Philip Peter and John Act. 8. Adde that daily many of Israel shall be converted And at last in the end of the world ALL THE ISRAELITES shall bee converted as saith the Apostle Rom. 11.26 And THEN shall this Prophesie of Hosea be perfectly fulfilled So S. Jerome and Christopherus a Castro And that by Israel must here bee understood as Gentiles so the natural Israelites converted unto Christ is the common exposition of the Fathers and School-men * Ita inquit A Lapid S. Hier. Cyril Ruffinus Haymo Hugo Albertus August l. 22. Contra Faustum cap. 89. saepe alibi Cyprian lib. Testim contra Judaeos cap. 19. Tertul. lib 4 contra Marc. cap. 16. Irenaeus lib. 1 cap. 4 Prosper lib. 2. De vocat Gentium cap. 18. Primas Anselm S. Thom. in Rom. 9. And upon v. 12. And the children of JVDAH and the children of ISRAEL shall be gathered together and appoint themselves one head c. For great shall be the day of Jezreel A lapade hath these words Then the Natural Jews and the Israelites shall be converted unto Christ ** Ita inquit A Lapid S. Hieron Haymo Alber. Vetab Arias a Castro They shall I say saith Alapide be gathered into one Church of Christ By Israel and Judah are fundamentally understood the true Israelites and those of Judah which shall bee converted unto Christ symbolically and mystically the Gentiles tobe coverted unto Christ And touching the great day of Jezreel that is the Day of the Messiah of which the Sibyl sang †Apud Virgil. Eclog. 4. Incipient magni procedere monises Then shall proceed the magnificent months c. As the Platonists called the time of the revolution and return of all things to their pristine or first perfection THE GREAT YEER So Christ brings the GREAT YEER when he repairs and reduceth all things to their primaeve orlinal felicity Again the day of Jezrreel signifies the Arm of God So all these daies of Jezreelare daies and works of the mighty arm of God so Arias And lastly The great day of Jezreel shall be the day of the Resurrection and Judgement So Cyril Adde to these things of Alapide That divers of the Popish Schoolmen viz. Aquinas Scotus and Cajetan hold many things of our Tenet according to Dr. â—rideaux his quotation of them § 2 As for Lutherans beside what Luther hinted in our first Book touching Abel and the Saints bodies after death Note the words of famous L. Osiander upon the twelfth of Daniel touching the computations of the times of Michael Messiah his delivering the Jews I think saith Osiander these yeers will fall in with that time in which the Popedome of Rome shall bodily be overthrown § 3 Out of the better sort of Christians viz. the choice Greâ—k and Latine Fathers and later learned pious Authors I have alleadged so much in our first Book that I shall now adde but some culled and picked flowers out of severall goodly Gardens asore omitted to make up the summe of the conclusion That our Thesis in the main is little lesse then as it were the voyce of the Law of nature in all men ¶ 1 Take in the first place as worthy to carry the colâ—urs Mr. Medes * Diatrib part 4. p. 455 c. p. 485. c. p. 490. c. p. 462. c. summary and pithy account * especially for Antiquity set forth long after I was a good way entred into this work Touching the question of the thousand yeers you may see I have demonstrated them to follow the times of the Beast and of the false Prophet and consequently the time of Antichrist And if the Apocalyps be canonicall Scripture it must needs be granted there is such a time to come or we must deny either Rome which now is to be Babylon or the Beast to be Antichrist or Antichristendome which those who opposed the ancient Chiliasts found so necessary as forced them having no other way to avoid their adversaries directly to deny the Apocalyps to be Scripture nor was it re-admitted till they thought they had found some commodious interpretation of the thousand yeers And yet the Apocalyps hath more humane not to speak of divine authoriy then any other book of the New Testament besides even from the time it was first delivered But we see ☞ what the zeale of opposition can do Justin Martyr alleadged This Dogma of the thousand yeers regnum or Kingdome was the general opinion of all orthodox Christians in the age immediately following the Apostles if Justin Martyr say true of whom see at large in our first Book and none knowne to deny it but Hereticks Irenaeus aâ—leadged See his words at length
certain 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Formes of Ecclesiastical doctrines according to which all Teachers in the Church were to frame their discourse and direct their opinions Some of these 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Formes of Ecclesiastical doctrine are recorded by Gelasius Cyzicenus in his Historiâ Actorum Concilii Niceni History of the Acts of the Council of Nice Amongst these there is this Forme for the Doctrine of the state of the Resurrection * 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Cap. 7.18 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Pâ— 27.13 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Mat. 5.5 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 â—â—a 26.6 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 The world was made more minute or lesse i.e. imperfecter or viler because of fore-knowledge For God fore-saw that man would sinne Therefore we expect NEW HEAVENS AND A NEW EARTH accrding to the holy Scriptures when shall shine forth the apparition or appearance and Kingdome of the great God and our Saviour Jesus Christ And THEN as Daniel saith Chap. 7.18 The Saints of the most HIGH SHAL TAKE THE KINGDOME and there shal be a pure earth holy a land of the living and not of the dead which David fore seeâ—ng by the eye of faith cryes out Psal 27.13 I beleeve to see the goodnesse of the Lord in the LAND OF THE LIVING A land of the meck and humble For blessed saith Christ Matth. 5.5 are the meek for they shall POSSESSE THE EARTH And the Prophet s aith Isa 26.6 The feet of the meek and the humble shall tread upon it 1. Judge by this notwithstanding fifty yeers opposition how powerfull the Chiliastical party yet was at the time of that Council By some whereof if this Forme were not framed and composed yet was it thus moderated as you see that both parties might accept it every mans interpretation being safe to himselfe as being delivered in the terms and language of Scripture 2 Judge whether in my explication of the state of the Thousand yeers I have not kept within the compasse of this Forme and not swerved one jot there-from This you see was the opiâ—â—on of the whole Orthodox Christian Church in the age immediately following the death of S. John when yet Polycarp and many of the Apostles Disciples were living as Justin Martyr expresly affirmes A Testimony absolute without all comparison to perswade such as rely upon authority and antiquity even as you have seen the same opinion continued throughout the next age following that And therefore it is to be ADMIRED that an opinion once so generally received in the Church should ever have been so cryed down and buried But those times which extinguished this brought other alterations into the Church beside this and perhaps something in lieu of that and relating to it which perhaps few observe that have knowledge enough of the rest namely that this opinion of the FIRST RESURRECTION was the reall ground and mother of prayers for the dead so anciently received in the Church which were then conceived after this manner THAT THEY MAY HAVE THEIR PART IN THE FIRST RESURRECTION See Tertullian who first mentions them The reason was because this having part in the first resurrection was not to be common to all but to be a priviledge to some namely of Martyrs and Consessors equipollent to them if God would so accept them Moreover the beleefe of this Prerogative of Martyrs in the first resurrection was that which made the Christians of those times so joyously desirous of Martyrdome These things will perhaps seem strange but will be found true if examined And yet may not seem so strange to considering minds if they take notice that even so neer to us as in King Edward the sixth his time in comparison of those ancient times though now an antiquity in parallel with later times this our opinion of the glorious state on earth yet to come before the ultimate judgement was given to that age as a Catechismal fundamental King Edward the fixth his Catechisme alleadges for our opinion to be drunk in by all that should receive the true Christian or Protestant Religion For the Author of the Catechisme set forth in that King Edward the fixth his time and by that King authorised May 20. in the last yeer of his reigne explicates the second Petition of the Lords prayer thus Q. How is that Petition Thy Kingdome come to be understood A. Wee aske that his Kingdome may come for as yet we see not all things subject to Christ wee see not how or that the stone is cut out of the mountaine ☞ without humane helpe which BREAKS INTO PEECES AND REDVCETH into NOTHING THE IMAGE DESCRIBED BY DANIEL how or that the onely rocke which is Christ doth POSSESSE AND OBTAINE THE EMPIRE OF THE WHOLE WORLD given him of the Father As yet Antichrist is not slaine whence it is that we desire and pray that at length it may come to passe and be fulfilled and that Christ alone may reigne with his Saints according to the divine promises And that be may live and have dominion in the world according to the decrees of the holy Gospel and not according to the traditions and laws of men and the wils of the TYRANTS of the World God grant saith the Reply of the Questionist that his Kingdome may come most speedily In Mr. Foxe his Martyrologie you shall find in the examination of Mr. Philpot that the Bishops when they came brought this Catechisme with them but what special relation it had to him I know not nor is ought there mentioned about it The Kings Letters before it begin thus Cum brevis explicata c. Whereas a compendious and plain way or forme of Catechisme written by a learnedman was presented unto us we committed the perusal and trial thereof to certain Bishops and other learned men c. And in the same Catechisme concerning the end of the world The Question being put thus The end of the world the sacred Scripture cals the consummation and perfection of the MYSTERY OF CHRIST and the RENOVATION OF ALL THINGS So the Apostle Peter speaks 2 Ep. Chap. 3. We expect new heavens and a new earth according to Gods promise wherein dwels righteousnesse And it seems agreeable to reason that the corruption mutability and sinne to which the whole world is subject should at last cease Now by what means or wayes of circumstances those things shall be brought to passe I desire to know of thee Answ I will declare as well as I can the same Apostle attesting The heavens in manner of a stormy tempest shall passe away and the elements estuating shall be dissolved and the earth and the works therein shall be burnt As if the Apostle should say The world like as wee see in gold shall be wholly purged with fire AND SHALL BEE BROVGHT TO ITS UTMOST PERFECTION which the little world man imitating shall likewise bee freed from corruption and mutation And so for mans sake for whose use the great world was
at first created being at length RENOVATED or made new it shall put on a face that shall be far more pleasant and beautiful All which is understood of a stare and time on earth afore the ultimate judgement For the next Question following in that Catechisme is concerning that Q. Deinde autem quid superest But after that what remaines A. Ultimum generale judicium the ultimate and general judgement for Christ shall come c. ¶ 2 Touching certaine parts and circumstantials of our opinion as that there shall be yet afore the ultimate end of the world a glorious time of the universal call of the Jews was the judgement of Chrysostome Orat. de vocat Judaecorum Paragraph 7. Hilary Austin Ambrose and Jerome whom for that Dr. Prideaux quotes and consents with them * And touching the coming of Elijah before the next coming of Christ was the general opinion of the Fathers as Dr. Iohn Alsted quotes and asserts ¶ 3 Of later Writers touching parcels of our opinion wee might quote many 1 Wendelinus in his natural Contemplations 2 Hieron Zanchius on Hof 3. 3 Functius his Chronologie 4 Rivetus on Hos 3. 5 Peter Martyr in his Common Places Class 2. cap. 4. and cap. 16. 6 Pareus on Rom. 11. Explicat dubiorum Johannes de Comb is compend Totius Theolog. Lib. 7. cap. 13. Alphonsus Conradus Of Mantua in his Commentary on the Revelation doth superabound upon the main point I will give you but some few special touches in his Commentary on Rev. We may see saith he that diverse hold that between Christs comming in the flesh and comming in Majesty there is a middle comming of spiritual power and force to destroy the great Antichrist and to reforme the Church This comming they say shall be in the end of the sixth Millenary or thousand yeers of which comming they make Enoch and Elijah the fore-runners They say that Antichrist shall bee destroyed by their preaching and his Kingdome abolished After which down-fall peace shall be granted to the Church and Satan shall be bound so that hee shall not bee able to disturbe the tranquillity thereof Now this peace and happy progresse of the Church they say shall last for the whole seventh Millenary till the last time of her troubles by the persecution of the Nations Gog and Magog because of Satan who they say shall then bee at liberty stirring them up against the godly These words quoted by Dr. John Alsted in his Treatise of the thousand yeers inferres this From hence it appeares saith Alsled that our opinion concerning these thousand yeers is no new and unheard-of thing As for Alsonsus Conradus his owne opinion heare a little of that First in his Preface This one thing perhaps saith he may offend the eares of some because I seem to promise a more plentifull peace to the Church then that likenesse of the crosse will allow of in which in this world the Church must be made conformable to Christ its head But let them bethinke themselves that this is not so contrary to the Scripture that it should bee objected against mee or laid to my charge as fit to bee reckoned in the number of those which are termed either impious or absurd Especially when as I cannot perceive by what meanes that happinesse which John writes the Church shall injoy Satan being bound can be made good except wee acknowledge some rest of the Church her enemies being overthrowne which I thinke indeed ever happened as often as the enemies of Gods people have been removed out of the way Now because the enemy John tells us shall be removed is more dangerous then all that ever yet infested Gods people it ought not to seem strange to any one if hee being once overcome the Church injoy a more plentifull peace then usuall Secondly in his Comment on Rev. 20.1 God being about to bestow saith Alsonsus a more plentifull peace on his Church then heretofore it sufficeth not him to have removed out of the way the BEAST and those Kings of the earth with an horrible slaughter except also he restrain Satan the beginner of all these mischiefes so that he may not raise any more those usuall strifes among them Wherefore the Angel comes down from heaven who repressing the fury of Satan shutteth him up as long as he pleases not to have the Churches peace to bee taken away So hee shutteth him up for a thousand yeers i.e. for that whole time that he will not have the Churches peace disturbed So far Alsonsus 9 There is a touch also in Matthew Cotterius in his Contin demonstrâ—expos of the Revelat. on Chap. 20. of this thousand yeers of which we speake onely he begins his thousand yeers a hundred and odd yeers too soon At which time as Alsted well observes is but the Praeludium 10 Adde to these the words of John Piscator an Author of esteem common among us in his Comment on the Revelation The happinesse of the faithfull who shall live upon earth after the down-fall of the Papacy is their great security from the hostile invasions of the wicked for a thousand yeers The singular happinesse of the Martyrs of Christ who before those thousand yeers indured persecution is their resurrection which shall be before the general Resurrection And in a Treatise hee wrote afore his death of which Dr. John Alsted had the perusall the said Piscator wrote much more of this our point which the said Alsted transcribed as he confesseth into his Treatise of the thousand yeers Give me leave to borrow but a little more of your patience and I will give you much in few words Many Writers of the former and this present age have published many things concerning Elias the Artist who is to come of the Lyon of the North who is neer at hand Of a fourth Northern Monarchy Of a great Reformation Of the conversion of the Jews c. See Theophrastus Paracelsus Michael Sendivogius in his Treatise of Sulphur Stephanus Pannonius of the circle of the works and judgements of God where among other things he writes thus It shall come to passe that the pure Gospel shall bee preached to the Americans before the end of the World That nothing is more sure then that the reformation of the East and South drawing on some famous Emperour whose types were Constantine and Theodosius both entituled the Great shall openly shew himselfe and granting liberty of Religion to them who professe the name of the holy Trinity shall do some great matter in the world for the glory of God for the re-building up of the Church and for the down-fall of Antichrist The Eastern Christians fired with the zeal of Christ shall make their way into ASIA it sâ—â—e and provoke the Jews to jealousie Rom. 11. And the spiritual babyâ—on shall be a prey to all Nations A resining of the Souldiers of God whereof is mention Zech. 13.8 9. i.e. Temptations and trials shall goe before this
there almost ruining the Church with all manner of calamities for four hundred yeers ye heard afore also of the Saracens invading Gallia Anno seven hundred and thirty after Christ and of their going into Judaea Anno 1009 yeers after Christ After which Warre continued with Christian Princes for divers hundreds of yeers not repelled as yet And as it was a good while after Constantine was Emperour ere he had stayed the bulke and rage of the tenth persecution many suffering almost in all Constantines time in several Kingdomes under the Roman Empire See Mr. Fox so after Constantines time downe all along the Doctors thousand yeers more or lesse in most Kingdomes under the Roman Empire See Mr. Fox or any Chronology which for avoyding tediousnesse we omit as to particulars So that from within the Doctors thousand yeers a long time The two Witnesses have Prophesied a great part of their one thousand two hundred and sixty yeers in sackcloth The Woman hath fled into the wildernesse The Beast hath power and the Dragon hath endeavoured the ruine of the Woman Rev. 11. Rev. 12. Rev. 13. And is not this universal persecution all the Doctors thousand yeers surely there were so many particulars as made up an universal To the Doctors last distinction That it was not continual but by turns or vicissitudes First we retort this upon the Doctor He saith that Satan was loosed before Constantine M. time Yet then the persecution was but by turnes witnesse the number of ten 2 After the time of Constantinus M. time which was about three hundred thirty six some say three hundred thirty one where or when was there any eminent stop for at least divers hundred yeers in the Roman Empire As all this while from the beginning of Constantines M. down those severall hundreds of yeers the persecution in Persia continued 3 In the Revel in the time of Satans being loosed yee shall finde it prophesied of some little interruption of the full tide of persecution yet then is Satan loosed To close our answer the Doctors whole Argument is not so proper and demonstrative but it may bee retorted Satans binding and Saints reigning concur But the Saints have not yet reigned no not in the pict thousand yeers of the Doctors but errours persecutions wars c. pressing downe the Churches as ye have heard have that time abounded by Arians Julian Goths and Vandals Saracens and Pope and Papists and Socinians and Turke and tyranical Kings and Princes to this day ergo this is not the thousand yeers of the binding of Satan And therefore if this the Doctors thousand yeers be past farewell they Carnall and low Saints seeing the sorrowfull preface wish and study to make them past Higher Saints seeing the joyful possession beleeve the plaine Scripture that they are yet to come The Saints must reign with Christ saith our Text Rev. 20.4 But in heaven Christ reignes not with them therefore upon earth Rev. 5.10 But they have not yet reigned For before that Antichrist must downe in the West the tenth part of the City must fall 2 The Jewes must be called 3 Satan bound that hee deceive no more till after the thousand yeers surely therefore the world must bee altered from that it is now afore that SECT II. The Doctors second Argument WHich he asserts he saith from those periods in which the event hath dictated to the more circumspect that Satan was loosed There are foure periods saith he more famous then the rest First in the yeer one thousand after the birth of Christ in the time of Pope Sylvester the second At which time the manifestation of Antichrist was promulgated in France preached at Paris divulged over the world and believed of many Second period is terminated by Pope Benedict the ninth whose time in and out and in the Papall chaire Reusner puts in the yeer Anno one thousand thirty two to one thousand forty six yeers or thereabout in which time all both Easterne and Westerne cry out Satan is loosed Third period takes its beginning in the destruction of Jerusalem in the time of Pope Hildebrand called Gregory the seventh and placed Anno one thousand seventy three by Reusner The life acts decrees of which Hildebrand seemed so mischievous and hellish to the Divines and Historians of that age that they were out of all doubt that the mystery of iniquity in the Revelation then attained its 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 highest increment and perfection of age and strength Fourth and last is terminated in Pope Boniface the 8. and is the beginning of the Ottoman family which time Reusner and Bucholcerus and Helvious put about Anno one thousand three hundred but draws its original begining from the government of Constantine the Great Of this Boniface the eighth it was common to say He entred in as a Fox lived as a Lion and dyed like a Dog So that from hence forward the Westerne Antichrist on one hand and the Easterne Mahumetan on the other rushing in with open robberies shew that Satan is loosed setting both of them on fire which ever since more or lesse burning as yet as wee feel are not extinguished All this is in Doctor Prideaux his major Proposition But saith he in the minor It is agreed among many as I have intimated afore in our first Argument and the events of things agree to it that the yeers of the binding of Satan did runne downe all the time of the said termes I have described of which this last is most conspicuous therefore this last opinion should at least out-weigh the rest viz. that Satan was all that time bound Wee answer first in general by denying the minor And as hee refers us to his former argument for proof so we refer you to our answer to it for refutation of it As hee urgeth the argument of many so we have and shall ballance against them the agreement of very many famous men on the contrary Howbeit we goe by divine rule and reason not by humane vote And as the Dr. argues so wee shall take up some passages in the Doctors argument to overthrow his argument and his distinction he gives by way of exposition to that his argument For in the close of this argument he fearing lest some viewing the said four periods should object as he expresseth that in these four terms appears rather the licentionsnesse of Satan then the binding of Satan distinguisheth thus We must saith he hold or keep in mind which before we inculcated That Satan invades the Church either with open butcheries by Tyrants raging with the sword or with occult hypocrisie under pretence of piety Now as Satan being bound the Papal Apollyon his Vicar was not wanting strenuously to supply his place so he being loosed afterwards the Turke in the Ottoman family came in to make up the band or legion Now I say to overthrow the minor and this his distinction we will take up some passages in his argument against him ¶ 1
are as one day with the Lord and then after that by way of exposition he saith We expect new heavens and a new earth All this in 2 Pet. 3. The beginning of the thousand yeers is the morning and day-light of this last day And the last end is the evening and night So that in the morning of this last day they that are Christs are raised and as soon as raised their everlasting life begins for they dye no more for ought I know ¶ 3 To the fifth and last place we answer It doth not infer the Antecedent The words in that Heb. 9.28 are Unto them that looke for him shall he appeare the second time without sinne unto salvation All that Mr. Baily saith upon this place to stretch it to his end is That Christ hath but two times of comming to the earth First in weaknesse to dye upon the Crosse Second time in glory to give everlasting salvation without distinction to all beleevers who look for his comming To which words of Mr. Baily wee say That it doth not follow infallibly that because the Apostle there names two commings by reason of the Antithesis of a second state in opposition to the state of humiliation that therefore there is no third time of his comming Mr. B. now confesseth a second comming of Christ to the earth And it were nothing contrary to Scripture if wee should say that after his second comming at the beginning of the thousand yeers he shall come againe the third time to universall and ultimate judgement But we contend not in this as in relation to our particular point here in hand but shall conclude our answer with this that all that can be inferred from this place is onely this That whereas Christ appeared with sinne upon the Crosse i. e. Hee was reputed a sinner by men and our sin imputed to him by God and was so was made a sacrifice for sin Isa 53.2 Cor. 5. v. ult At his next appearing his second appearing after this as the Apostle reckons hee shall appear in no such garb under no such opinion or notion but most glorious which is truly performed at the beginning of the thousand yeers at which time begins the salvation of them that look for him SECT IV. Mr. Bailyes fourth Argument THe conceit of the thousand yeers makes Christs Kingdome to be earthly and most observable for all worldly glory But the Scripture makes it to be spirituall without all worldly pompe Neither doth the word of God make the Kingdome of the Mediator of two kinds and of a different nature but one uniform from the beginning to the end Luke 1.32 The Lord shall give unto him the Throne of his Father David and he shall reigne over the house of Jacob for ever And 1 Cor. 15.25 He must reigne till hee hath put all things under his feet Here this is but one Kingdome and one way of ruling a Kingdome meerly spiritual and no wise worldly Luke 17.20 The Kingdome of God commeth not with observation neither shall they say Lo here or lo there but the Kingdome of God is within you And John 18.36 My Kingdome is not of this world If my Kingdome were of this world then would my servants fight but now is my Kingdome not from hence Rom. 14.17 The Kingdome of God is not meat and drinke but righteousnesse peace and joy of the Holy Ghost Eph. 1.20 Hee raised him up from the dead and set him at his right-hand in heavenly places and hath put all things under his feet and gave him to be head over all to the Church Then Mr. Baily concludes with this untrue speech The Millenaries make his Kingdome to appeare in Armies and Battels in feasts and pleasures in worldly pomp and power and will not have his Kingdome to stand in ANY of that spiritual power which since his ascension he hath executed on Principalities and Powers which is a false speech if intended as it appears of all Millenaries and so of Protestant Millenaries And it is an answer sufficient meerly to deny what he doth simply affirme without proof If any shall say that we may give a word of answer to this aspersion and rid our hands of it that Battels and Armies at first shall be remotio impedimenti to beat downe Turk and Pope and all their obstinate adherents as it is in Dan. 12. Rev. 17.16 Rev. 19.19 to the end that so these enemies being beaten downe the Kingdome we speak of might be set up it doth not therefore follow that it is asserted that this Kingdome doth consist in these or if it should be said that to all the spiritual glory and power and pleasures they shall have added all outward comforts in a sanctified manner as Adam had as the Apostle Heb. 2.6 in a quotation out of the eighth Psalme as the eighth Psalme is quoted out of Gen. 1.26 sets forth this Kingdome in its peace and comfort to bee like that of Adam in innocency doth it therefore follow that its ave red that this Kingdome consists in these as in its essentials They marbee additionals and circumstantials Isa 65.16 to the end and Matthy 19.29 yet not be the fundamentals and essentials much lesse can it bee truly imagined that any Protestant so indeed would say as Mr. B. affirmes that this Kingdome of which we speake doth not stand in any of that spiritual power which since Christs Ascension hee hath executed on Principalities and Powers Sure the spiritual power shall continue there though it doth not exercise it selfe on Principalities c. when they have submitted onely I make this exception If Mr. Baily means a Classical Presbyterian power I think there shall be none at all I say the lesse to these foule aspersions in this place because I have so abundantly anticipated my selfe afore where I have ripped up the whole mystery of all this iniquity In the third Book Chapter 3. Section 2. beginning at page 369. Jerome is brought in jerking at the Millenaries to the same tune as doth Mr. Baily But hee is I thinke as soundly and justly jerked for his injustice more scholastico as ever any Libeller was by the Lictor or Bedle of the Magistrate There for his fables you have it retorted upon him that by his owne allegation he intimates that the opinion of the thousand yeers was ancienter then his time And his own words are brought against him wherein he confesseth that many Ecclesiastical men and Martyrs have said the same things that he spake against And therefore hee confesseth that he cannot condemne them even when hee had reported them farre worse then ever they spake Yee have there likewise Justin Martyr brought effectually disproving Jerom. Adde to all yee have there Mr. Medes taking Jerom to task In the same third Book third Chapter and third Section yee have the particulars of the aspersions discussed and their Authors disproved They are fathered upon Cerinthus by one Gaius seconded by Dionysius Alexandrinus simply
it for a ground that Antichrist shall be destroyed and fully abolished before the thousand yeers begin But saith Mr. B. the Scripture makes Antichrist to continue to the day of judgement 2 Thess 2.8 Then shall the wicked one be revealed and destroyed by the brightnesse of Christs comming which is not before the last day as before is proved See also Rev. 19.20 The Beast was taken c. compare with it verse 7. Let us be glad and rejoyce for the marriage of the Lamb is come Antichrist is cast alive into the Lake at the Marriage of the Lamb. No living men are cast into Hell before the last day And Christs Marriage with his Church is not solemnized with a part of the Elect but with the whole body at the general Resurrection ¶ 2 Ans There is no such thing in 2 Thess 2.8 as that Antichrist shall continue to the day of judgement unlesse Mr. B. agree with us that the day of judgement begins at the thousand yeers whereat indeed is Christs appearing That Master Baily saith Christ shall not come till the last day of judgement that Master Baily hath not yet proved that in 19 of the Rev. v. 20. and in v. 7. wee grant but Mr. B. glosse upon it we have no reason to receive which was this That no living men are cast alive into hell before the last day of judgement This Mr. B. hath not proved we have a text to the contrary even that of M. B. quoting Rev. 19.20 which is at the beginning of the thousand yeers compare Chap. 20.1 2 3. But Mr. Baily faith this was done immediately before the Marriage of the Lamb. An. we grant it And this is in the beginning of the thousand yeers But Christ solemnizeth his Marriage saith Mr. B. not with a part of his Elect but with the whole body Answ We grant it And this shall be at the beginning of the thousand yeers At which time all the Elect shall rise CHAP. IV. § 1 WEE have done with the Objections of Dr. Prideaux and Pareus and Mr. Baily against our Point Next wee should come to answer the Objections of the Book called Christs Kingdome on earth opened according to the Scriptures set forth by T. HAYNE 1645 if they were worthy the writing out Indeed I expected much but found very little for in his first Chapter he hath three Arguments to prove That Christs Kingdome is long since begun But in his stating the Question as he pretends he never distinguisheth of Christs several formes of his Kingdom viz. invisible and visible but speaks of Christs Kingdome as of one onely form whereupon these three inconveniences to himself do follow ¶ 1 That in all his Arguments there is not one conclusion that doth distinctly conclude against our point viz. to conclude as he should therefore Christs visible Kingdome is begun already upon ear◠¶ 2 That his three last arguments conclude in effect that Christ had no spiritual Kingdome in the Old Testament for he saith Christ began to bee King when he sent out his Disciples with that Commission in Mat. 28.20 If then only Christ began to be King then was he not King before that but Christ told Pilate the contrary afore that ¶ 3 That he contradicts himselfe First In this P. 1. he saith That at all times Christ rules hath an absolute Kingdome in the world with many other expressions of the same effect yet P. 4. he by three severall arguments would prove when and what yeer Christs Kingdome began And P. 5. at such a particular time Christs Kingdome was at hand long since Secondly He contradicts himselfe in this that P. 1. He affirmes Christs Kingdome is to be for ever quoting Heb. 1.8 making no distinction upon it and yet P. 2. He confesseth that Christ shall at the last judgement resigne his Kingdome to the Father quoting 1 Cor. 15.24 making no interpretation to explaine or reconcile these By this you may see that his arguments were not worth the writing out much lesse the answering CHAP. V. Containing an Answer to an UNIVERSAL ARGUMENT or to the ARGUMENT OF THE UNIVERSALITY or generality of men that oppose § 1 THere is one knot yet behinde like to have been let slip which is chawed in the mouths of many yea of most Disputants that are contrary minded to rivet it faster as mine ears in part can witnesse The Argument is from 1 Thess 4.16 17. The Lord himselfe shall descend from Heaven c. And the DEAD IN CHRIST shall rise first THEN WE which are alive and remain shall be caught up together with them in the CLOUDS to meet the Lord in the aire and so shall be EVER WITH THE LORD Now say they how can this consist with the Saints reigning on earth a thousand yeers For if they must reigne there a thousand yeers what need they be caught up into the CLOUDS or how if they reigne on earth a thousand yeer are they said to be EVER with the Lord especially if there they be as some say subject to mortality at last § 2 Answ Mr. Mede hath so learnedly and appositly discussed this place for our use in this particular that his Dilucidations thereon will suffice for a full answer It is not needfull saith he that the resurrection of those which slept in Christ and the rapture of those which shall be left alive together with them into the aire should be at one and the same time For the words in 1 Thess 4. v. 16 17. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 first and then or afterwards may admit a great distance of time as 1 Cor. 1.15.23 Everyone or all mankinde shall rise in their order Christ the first fruits that is first 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 afterwards they that are Christs at his coming Here 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 afterwards notes a distance of time of above a thousand and a halfe of yeers as we finde by experience Suppose therefore this rapture of the Saints into the aire be to translate them to heaven yet it might be construed thus The dead in Christ that is for Christ namely the Martyrs shall rise first afterwards 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 viz. a thousand yeers after we which are alive and remain shall together with them be caught up in the Clouds and meet the Lord in the aire and so from thenceforth we shall ever bee with the Lord. Thus Tertullian seems to understand it who interprets 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or as it is in verse 14. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 of Martyrs namely such as dye propter Christum for Christ by means of Christ through Christ for Christs sake taking 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 as noting the cause or meanes of their death so Piscator expounds the like speech Apâ—c 14.13 Blessed are the dead which die 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 id est propter Dominum for the Lord Beza qui Domini causa moriuntur which dye for the Lords sake 2 If thus
continued History of future times And thirdly Doctor Prideaux himselfe makes it so in presuming to determine the binding of Satan to be past Fourthly Some anticipations there are in the Revelation as we have shewed but they doe no more overthrow the confirmation of the order of things then in Genesis or other Books of Scripture in which are many anticipations Fifthly Mark the order of continuation In 6 7 8 Chapters are the seven Seals then out of the seventh Seale seven Trumpets c. all which methodically carry on the continuation as Mr. Mede hath demonstrated And for the computations they are so noted in their beginnings and endings that we can with more certainty compute our conclusion then the Doctor doth the contrary § 3 Pareus his exceptions doe but idem saxum volvere tumble over againe the same stone That which wee have before laid downe will sufficiently refute him and Mr. Hain and other Replicants Finis Libri Quinti THE SIXTH BOOK Holding forth particularly WHAT this GLORIOUS State on Earth shall be of which we have treated all this while in the former five BOOKS THE INTRODUCTION Laying forth the generall Heads of this Book touching the WHAT of this Glorious Time § 1 HAving demonstrated the Quòd sit THAT there is A Glorious state of all things yet to bee on Earth afore the universal judgement of all the quicke and dead Next we are to declare the Quid sit WHAT the said glorious state shall be § 2 For which we have already made some way and preparation by a necessitated anticipation by reason that the proofs being Divine and interwoven with severall passages of both viz. of the That and What of this aforesaid state we could not pick the one from the other nor explaine and demonstrate the meaning of the former without a scruteny into some passages of the later where we found them so intermixt Howbeit we insisted upon them no further then to a proofe of the literall meaning of the place reserving the distinct and larger discusse for this Book In this WHAT are to be considered these five Heads § 3 I The Chaos Of the glorious state aforesaid yet to come and to be on earth afore the ultimate judgement II The Creation Of the glorious state aforesaid yet to come and to be on earth afore the ultimate judgement III The Dimensions Of the glorious state aforesaid yet to come and to be on earth afore the ultimate judgement IV The Qualifications Of the glorious state aforesaid yet to come and to be on earth afore the ultimate judgement V The Priviledges Of the glorious state aforesaid yet to come and to be on earth afore the ultimate judgement CHAP. I. Touching the Chaos § 1 BY the Chaos we mean the preparation to this estate or the manner of the beginning thereof That as in the old and first Creation the Chaos was the evening of the world with which it began as the Rabbins before quoted * Lib. 4. Chap. 4. use to speake so this second or New Creation as it is called Isa 65.17 2 Pet. 3.13 Rev. 21.1 begins with an evening And as after that as an Antitypicall memoriall of the finishing thereof celebrated on the Sabbaticall seventh day the Church of the Jews in all ages to Christs time began their Sabbath in the evening so this Sabbatisme of the glorious state of which we speak as it is called Heb. 4. afore largely explained shall begin and have its Ante-scene or Prelude in a kind of evening Now as the evening taken in that largeness as Gen. 1. in the first part hath some light and sometimes a glare of the Sun at its last withdrawing though the day hath been dusk and dim all afore and receives for a farewell a reflexion of the beams darted backward upon the clouds with a twy-light following it but in the latter part it is darke So in this evening in the first part thereof there shall be some manifestation of the Sonne of Righteousnesse the Lord Jesus Christ for the Call of the Jewes Zach. 12.10 Rev. 1.7 and the setting them on foot to contend for their liberty against the Turk and all Antichristian enemies But in the latter part of this evening after that Christ hath rowsed them up to that contest there shall be a darknesse of great troubles Da. 12.1 And these troubles it seems by the two last ver of that 12 of Dan. may last 45 yeers afore the Jews with the Gentiles come to their glorious enjoyments at the resurrection of all the Elect deceased and the change of the believers then alive But when that evening and night is passed over the Righteous shall have the DOMINION in the morning Psal 49. v. 14. which learned Junius interprets of the Saints happy estate in the morning of the resurrection which S. John Rev. 20.4 calls the first Resurrection as we have before demonstrated For at the last ultimate end when CHRIST layes downe all his rule and power 1 Cor. 15.24.28 we cannot imagine that Christians may be said to have Dominion § 2 Now as in the evening shutting in there is an end a setting in a cloud and a darkning of all the glory of the precedent day all glorious things are wrapt up in obscurity and all glorious persons their Masters Kings Princes and Potentates are couched and crouched downe as beasts in their dens and lye like dead men and none of all these things or persons survive but whom and what God will permit to escape fire or death c. So this glorious state shall begin as to the preface or preparation with a setting and dark eclipsing of all the worldly glory of former times things and persons viz. of the foure former Monarchies root and branch with all their impertinent appurtenances that stand in the way to hinder Christs glorious Kingdome on earth Dan. 7. Rev. 11.18 and 19. Chapters c. of which abundantly afore And we have seen it far more by experience since this subject was divers yeers by-past preached and asserted Wonder not therefore at the pullings downe of humane glories to this day and the many scuffles about them almost over the whole World The summe of worldly pompe is declining towards Sun-set the shadowes grow long it begins to be duske upon all Secular splendor The night comes on great stormes will arise but though they may be universall on the Jewes for the said five and forty yeers because universally they have for above five and forty scores of yeers refused the Messiah yet likely the tempest on the Gentiles that have owned Christ may but drive along by coasts falling here and there by succession they having suffered much already for Christs sake by Heathens Turks Papists and falsely named Protestants § 3 But as after the shutting down of the evening even in the dark night there is still a continued tendency towards the succeeding day and the glory thereof The Sunne is still hastening to rise again So
same purpose apply Hag. 2.21 22. By shaking heaven and earth once more saith he the Prophet seems to mean in part that there shall be a change not onely of the customes of the people which are the Earth but also of Kingly powers and humane Majesties which are the Heavens Which place of Haggai the Apostle applies to the Kingdome of Christ Heb. 12.26 27.28 29. of which application though part may comport with the Kingdome of Christ as spiritual which hath ever been yet the rest seems to â—ooke as farre as Christs Kingdome to come on Earth For since Haggais or Pauls time God never so shook the material heavens of Orbs and Stars or the metaphorical of Royalties and Majesties that the Kingdome succeeding as the Text plainly intends could not be moved Even as the close exhorting to serve God acceptably because he is a consuming fire is most like to Peters exhortation 2 Pet. 3. to bee holy in conversation because after the destruction of the world by fire we shall have new heavens and a new Earth The place seems to allude to and to Prophesie from Gods shaking of Mount Sinai that as at that time God shook his people out of Egypt and separated them by divine Lawes from all the Nations of the earth to be a Royall Church by themselves so he will shake all the world of high and low ones when he sets up his last kingdom viz. Christs visible kingdom on earth and therewith makes all new For saith my Author that same Once more signifies the removing of all former old things in Earth and Heaven viz. of Customes of People and Crownes of Kinglyhoods and makes all new with sanctity and spirituality in the quality though men and creatures shall be in substance extant upon the earth according to their species or kinde and his Sovereignty in paramount glory ruling all Just as Zachary hath it Chap. 14. verse 9. And the LORD shall be KING over ALL the EARTH In that day shall there be ONE LORD and his name one That is as some learned expound There shall be no more Lords but the Lord Christ and his Dominion shall be greater then ever any was Which the Prophet Malachy doth notably surveigh Chap. 1. verse 11. in these words From the rising of the Sunne even to the going downe of the same my name shall bee great among the Gentiles c. CHAP. IV. Concerning the Qualifications or Qualities of this Kingdome of Christ Viz. Negatively it is a State that is Sinless Sorrowless Deathless Superiorless c. Temptationless Timeless Positively it is the Restauration of the Creation Perfection of all Qualities Confluence of all Comforts Preface to Eternity With several other Qualifications by a natural and necessary consequence flowing from these SECT I. It is Sinlesse § 1 ANd no wonder For it is not imaginable that the deceased Saints should be raised and the living changed to injoy this glorious state on earth in Christs Kingdome with the least tincture of sinne either of their owne or others This were to bring the deceased Saints to their losse And the changed state of the living would not be freed from sinne which would bee their greatest sorrow which as the next Section demonstrateth cannot consist with this glorious state It would be a misery not a felicity for the soules of the deceased to come out of supernal glory into a body of sinne or for them or the changed to be mixed with the society of gracelesse men A meer regenerate estate not yet perfect lamented that condition so long since as Lot and David 2 Pet. 2.7 Psal 120.5 yea the latter complained of society with men of faire outsides flattering with their lips and eating bread at his Table but were not right at heart And our Saviour warns his Disciples as of a danger that they should bee among men that outwardly seem to be sheep but inwardly were Wolves which this glorious state will not admit So then the huge augmentation of this Kingdome or fifth Monarchy shall not as in worldly Monarchies cause pollution and corruption This shall bee Status optimus maximus the biggest and best state that ever was or shall be on earth all suitable to a resurrection The places of Scripture asserting the sinlesseness of this time are very many and very cleer so that I need but repeat them to convince the ingenuous Reader ¶ 1 Adam we know was created sinlesse according to the Image and likenesse of God to have Dominion over all and to rest on the Sabbath now this state of Adam is applied by David Ps 8. to a future state of man which the Apostle Paul accommodates to our estate and rest in the inhabited world to come Heb. 2.5 and Chap. 4. verse 9. as wee have afore demonstratively expounded those places If there be any difference it is in this as the Apostle sets it forth 1 Cor. 15. that our estate shall be better then his ¶ 2 Num. 30.5 6 8. The Lord thy God wil bring thee into thine owne land and the Lord thy God will circumcise thine heart and the heart of thy seed to love the Lord thy God with all thy heart and all thy soul and thou shalt returne and obey the voyce of the Lord and do AL HIS COMMANDEMENTS Which was spoken of and to the Jews long since deceased being never yet so fulfilled to them or any of that Nation succeeding them and therefore according to the truth of God must be fulfilled to all the elect of them and of their posterity ¶ 3 Isa 11.6 The Wolfe shall dwell with the Lamb c. and they shall not hurt c. For the earth shall bee FULL OF THE KNOWLEDGE OF THE LORD AS THE WATERS COVER THE SEA which whether we understand of men or beasts it argues a restauration to an estate like that of innocent Adam And the reason adds the glory of the cause as the thing is a most glorious effect That this innocent time shall follow upon an ocean of divine knowledge ¶ 4. Isa 59.21 This is my Covenant my WORD AND MY SPIRIT SHALL NEVER DEPART from thee for ever ¶ 5. Isa 35.8 There shall be an high-way and it shall be called the way of holinesse THE UNCLEAN SHAL NOT PASSE OVER IT ¶ 6. Isa 60.21 Thy people shall be ALL RIGHTEOUS ¶ 7. Jer. 32.40 41. I will make an everlasting Covenant with them that I will not turne away from them to doe them good But I will put my feare into their heart that they shall not depart from me Yea I will rejoyce over them to doe them good and will plant them in this Land assuredly WITH MY WHOLE HEART and WHOLE SOUL See this great promise must be fulfilled when the Jewes are settled in their owne land ¶ 8. Ezech. 36.23 to verse 30. I will gather you from all Countries and bring you into your owne land and I will sprinkle cleane water upon you and you shall be cleane from ALL
happinesse then it must not be taken from them by the old misery of death If all the Elect dead and alive must reigne on earth a thousand yeers as we have proved then there must be no death to cut this time shorter They doe not reigne if subject in the thousand yeers to that great enemy Death Nor do any of them live a thousand yeers if by succession they dye in that thousand yeers If there shall be no more sorrow nor cries nor paines as wee heard afore how then can this Man-eater death continue If sinne be gone why should death remaine § 2 But to leave discourses and come to plaine places of Scripture which are divers ¶ 1 Isa 25.8 He i. e. the Lord mentioned in the former verses will swallow up death in victory and the Lord God will wipe away all tears from off all faces and the rebuke of his people c. Wee before demonstrated that this place belongs to the glorious time we speake of sc when the Jewes are called And you see how full it speaks to the thing of the removal of death Calvin confesseth that this is under Christs Kingdome and addes under Christs universal Kingdom And sure Christ as Christ hath no Kingdom in heaven after the ultimate judgement nor universal now ¶ 2 Another place is in Hos 13.14 I will ransome them from the power of the grave And I will redeem them from death O death I will be thy plagues O grave I wil be thy destruction Repentance shall be hid from mine eyes Which place is evidently spoken to Ephraim the ten Tribes verse 12. therefore this cannot relate to the return of the two Tribes from Babylon And it is as evident that more then a spiritual deliverance of a mans soul from death in sin is meant in that here is joyned deliverance from the grave with deliverance from death And twice a mention of grave But much adoe there is with some that would faine make this Text a continuation of the Prophets minatory speech in the former Chapter But the words are plaine words of mercy and a Prophesie of mercy quoted by Paul not onely that God can doe such a thing as in the Text but that he will do it Again how common is it for the Prophets in their preaching mifericordias cum minis mifcere to mingle mercies with minatories So that they may as well say almost that the 14. Chapter is a continuation of threatnings It is frequent in this Prophesie to make threats and comforts so take their turnes Chap. 1. Chap. 2. c. And to me it is plaine and evident that as it is noted in our English Translation at verse 9. begins a Sermon of mercy and so is continued to the end of the 14. verse It is said in verse 9. O Israel thou not I hast destroyed thy self Thou hast brought thy misery on thy selfe But I will be thy King where is any other to save thee in all thy Cities So plainly according to Heb. And for experience the Lord tells Ephraim that the King they desired and had could not save them And therefore God was their onely saving King and therefore was not pleased in giving them a King and in anger did he take away Kings from them because of their confidence in them but this taking them away would make way for their imbracing God for their King according to that which follows in the ensuing promises As for verse 12. The iniquity of Ephraim is bound up and hid Hiding as well sounds of justification and pardon of sin Psal 32.1 Rom. 4.7 as of punishment And for the 13. verse close to the Hebrew thus Sorrows of a woman in travel will come upon him viz. Ephraim He an unwise Sonne * 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 If vid. Schindl if he shall stay long in the breaking forth of children i. e. in the straitnesse of the womb i. e. If by repentance he doe not help himselfe out of his sorrows But however verse 14. I sayes the Lord if Ephraim be unwise and helps not himselfe yet I the Lord will ransome them c. as aforesaid Sure enough these words are plaine for the point in hand even as both those two places aforesaid are severall times quoted in the New Testament and applied to a state that is to be afore the ultimate day of judgement ¶ 3 For 1. both places seem to mee to be touched in 1 Cor. 15.54 55. As our new notes on the Bible concur with mee For in the 54. verse seems to be quoted Isa 25.8 For the Apostles words are plainly the same with Isaiah Death is swallowed up in victory And in 55. verse seems a quotation of Hos 13.14 For the Apostles challenge is plainly according to Hosea O grave where is thy victory Secondly The Apostle makes application of the fulfilling of these Prophesies to be at the time we speak of sc of the visible glory of the Church on earth For which observe these particulars First The Apostle mentions our restitution to our state in the first Adam by Christ the second Adam v. 49. compared with Psal 8. As Psal 8. with Gen. 1.26 to which end the visible glorious state of the Church is set out by having a Fountain and Tree of life alluding to Paradise Rev. 22. All which import a state upon earth Secondly That the Apostle mentions the time to be at the sound of the last Trumpet importing other Trumpets to sound first so that the last Trumpet is the seventh as John numbers them not hid from Paul Now from the beginning of the sounding of the seventh Trumpet so many things follow as wee have several times demonstrated that there must of necessity be a state of the Churches visible glory before the ultimate day of judgement For when Rev. 11.15 the seventh Angel sounded then First There was an Earthquake v. ibid. Secondly A proclaiming that the Kingdomes of the earth are the Kingdomes of Christ v. 15. Christ shall reign for ages of ages till time be no more ibid. Fourthly Saints sing praise for it v. 16 17. Fifthly Christ takes to him his great power and now reigns v. 17. Sixthly Nations are angry at it v. 18. Seventhly The Saints are raised and rewarded v. 18. Eighthly A destroying of them that destroyed the earth and care is taken of the earth v. 18. Ninthly The Temple of God is opened and the Arke discovered v. 19. Tenthly Lightinings and thundrings and earthquakes and great haile v. 19. All these here beside that in Rev. 20. Rev. 21. Rev. 22. From the beginning of the seventh Trumpet to the end of it Now let any ingenuous man judge by these ten particulars whether they are consistent with heaven above and whether they must not necessarily import a state on earth So that the Apostle here in this 1 Cor. 15. mentioning the raising of the Saints the cloathing of them with incorruption and the changing of them that are alive quoting those two
c. As saith he Our beloved brother Paul speaks of these things in all his Epistles which unlearned and unstable men wrest So that in Peters judgement many things of this New Heavens and New Earth and of this glorious time are in Pauls Epistles but being as Peter hints profoundly delivered are not understood by many but perverted as we see at this time Well let us understand Paul better then so In that Rom. 8. verse 18. c. The sufferings of this present time are not worthy to bee compared with the glory which shall bee revealed in us mark REVEALED and IN US It is a bringing downe glory to us into us Then it follows verse 19. The earnest expectation of the creature waiteth for the manifestation of the Sonnes of God Mark It is here plaine that the natural creature is meant not the spiritual new creature viz. the regenerated souls They are the Sons of God And these two are contradistinct And mark further that it is said It waits for the manifestation of the Sonnes of God whereas glory in the highest heavens is an hiding of them from the Creation and would disappoint it of its expectation which must not bee because that expectation and waiting is the instinct of the creature And that is so much as that it may not be in vaine By that a tree grows to his period of age be it in never so many hundred yeers c. Accidentals of wens and warts winds and weathers doe not eradicate his instinct The curse is accidental to the creature not of the essence the creation still by instinct looks for his former state in Adam and therefore as notwithstanding nipping winter the creature every spring hath its petty resurrections as types and pledges of the great as the little Jubilee of the great So its expectation by instinct shall not faile of the great Restauration And this accidentall the Apostle argues in the next verse sc 20. The creature was made subject to vanity not willingly sc not essentially of its essential frame but by reason of him who subdued it under hope i. e. The creature was made substantially glorious essentially exceeding good and then after Adams fall which that it was the same day or suddenly after his creation I cannot yet believe Divines best reasons are not to mee convincing I cannot thinke that God would make such an excellent piece to be like a bubble or sparke Though in the third Chapter of Genesis is presently mention of Adams fall and Chapter 4. of Adams two sonnes yet Adam was an hundred and thirty yeers old when he had his third son sc Seth. I say then after Adams fall it was subject to vanity i. e. fading and unconstant with changes by Winter and Summer by him who subjected it sc by Gods curse on the creature not in anger to it but as a punishment to man whom as a Lord they should have served But God subjected it not for ever to that condition but under hope As he cursed man not forever but gave him a promise of salvation by the seed of the woman Christ that the Serpents head shall be bruised scrooched And so as man by distinct hope waites and God is mindfull of that promise above foure thousand yeers after Rom. 16.10 So the creatures have an instinct of hope impressed on their essence that they shall be restored And here is a promise for it in this 8. of Rom. verse 21. That in perfection they shall serve their Lord viz. Man being restored to his perfection by the man Christ Jesus There is a shadow of this instinct in all plants sleeping birds c. in that they live in Winter in secret and every Spring put forth in hope as the Apostle speaks that the time is come And if that be not the time then at next Winter they retire againe and wait another Winter Just as men did rationally Luke 24.21 wee hoped that this had been he c. And Act. 1. Mr. Wilt thou then at this time restore the Kingdome to Israel If not they must wait longer And as men distinctly so the creation instinctly For the promise is sure to both Verse 21. The creature it selfe also shall be delivered from the bondage of corruption into the glorious liberty of the Sonnes of God See againe the creature and the sonnes of God are two distinct things To understand the minde of the words note first that Bondage imports the creature came into this condition not from its original essence and first constitution but accidentally and violently by mans corruption sc the Fall in Adam Secondly Note that corruption is of three sorts ¶ 1 In a physical or natural respect as now the natures of all the creation are corruptible dissolvable fading as in Autumn Winter or other periods or to be corruptible with malignant qualities as the elements of aire water c. and plants grow unwholesome c. The Stars to be ecclipsed clouded and stained with malevolent constellations blasting and hurting things below and all to the defacing of their glory and dis-service to the Saints ¶ 2 In Civil respects or uses They are worne and wasted and wearied and bruised for the use of man As Land Cattel Plants c. ¶ 3 In a spiritual respect so by the sinne and corruption yet remaining in the best of men they are made to serve for sinfull uses not onely by the wicked but sometimes by the Saints as when they are used to superfluous superabounding banqueting or to please our pride or the vanity of our minds c. § 3 Now to be delivered from this corruption into the glorious liberty of the Sonnes of God imports That as the Saints shall now be advanced to the full liberty of the Sons of God sc they shall be no more under the bondage of infirmities of nature or Satans temptations or the imperiousnesse of sin or the violence of unjust men but shall bee naturally civilly and spiritually free from having receiving or doing any hurt their state shall be a full liberty and a glorious one so all the creatures of the whole creation shall partake of the same liberty thus far ¶ 1 They shall be delivered from the corruption and fading that adheres to their nature ¶ 2 They shall be delivered from the violence done to them by men ¶ 3 From their sinful use ¶ 4 Shall be delivered to their right owner viz. to the second Adam and his posterity who shall onely use them well As man shall not sweat and toyle in labour which was the curse on Adam after his fall and therefore now to be taken off so man shall not oppresse and grieve and discourage the creature How plaine then is this Text of the Restauration of the Creation to them that will understand And this was never yet fulfilled but spoken to Saints as yet expecting it verse 22.23 The creature groans and travelleth in pain till now sc under the corruption before explained and not only
months when as he shall lie sicke a great part of them yea he shall be as it were slaine by meanes of his wounded head This space of time doth seem therefore to containe the whole time of the tyranny of Antichrist yet so that the time of his wound whiles it is sore be taken away from it Now we have shewed that this time of his crazinesse is defined within the time of the Goths* ⎠* Kingdome verse 3. which lasted for an hundred and forty yeers If we shall therefore take away these yeers from the months of the Womans lurking we shall finde that at the end of this lurking namely at the yeer 1546. thirty seven months ☞ onely The count is selfe according to Mr. Brightman and ten dayes of Antichrists Kingdome when it was in vigor were passed over Five months therefore and twenty dayes are wanting hereto which if we reckon from the yeer 1546. the last end of Antichrist shall expire at the yeer 1686. or thereabouts For so we shall learne out of other Scriptures that he shall perish utterly about that time It may bee that his destruction may come sooner then this terme of yeers defineth for I doe not cast the account accurately at this time neither doe the Historians number the yeers so faithfully as they ought but he shall not be suffered to goe beyond the furthest space that I have set down But perhaps these months are not the space from the first beginning to the last end of the Beasts but onely the former yeers of his Kingdome which may be many enough to lay him open so as hee may be revealed to all men And by this interpretation as he beginneth together with the months of the Woman and the Prophets so he takes his end also with them This opinion is confirmed by the Warre with the Saints in verse 7. which wee have shewed fell into the end of these months Chap. 12.7 And by this interpretation the Beast is said to have power of working two and forty months for the greatest part of these months Because that little respire of time wherein he should keep in his horne because of his wounded head is little to be reckoned of in respect of the whole number * Let the Reader if he please remember that whereas Mr. Brightman thinks Antichrist was wounded by the Goths noted afore at * ⎠* according to Rcusner expressed afore in his Account Sect. 1. the Goths wounded the Emperour and Empire not the Pope and Popedome but the said Popes and Popedome rather got head and bea rt and health and strength by the Goths wounding of the Empire which granted Mr. Brightmans knot is quite removed touching the five months Neither is his power which shall bee afterwards like that of his former time as experience sheweth at this day wherein we see the Popes power to be made to languish and to be weakned much from the time of his professed and pitched battel that is from the Council of Trent So that his power is now almost none at all to that which it was in former ages This latter is more simple in which regard I like it better Thus Mr. Brightman Now according to this account Antichrist shall be fully downe about seven and twenty yeers hence SECT V. Alsteds Account HE gives it you * Alsted XII Chronologia Epocharum Propheticarum in this sorme and the words as neer as I can translate and imitate him for your best understanding THE APOCALYPTICAL VOLUMNE or COMMENTARY †Syngramma Apocalypticum Three times seven mysticall Characters * Hierogly phicater septem The threefold state of the Church  The Kingdome of the Beast I. The 6 former of the 7 Seals containe the time from the the 35 yeer of Christ to the 606 yeer  I. For a Time from the yeer of Christ 35 to the yeer 606. I. The ancient Beast or the primary solely II. The six former of the seven Trumpets from the yeer of Christ 606. to the yeer 1517. 1 Alternative or vicissitudinarious II. For Times from the yeer 606. to the yeer 1517. II. The ancient or primary and secundary III. The six former of the seven Phials from the yeer 1517. to the yeer 1694 The seventh Trumpet and seventh Phial 2 Happy on earth for a 1000 yeers III. For Half a Time from the yeer of Christ 1517. to the yeer 1694. III. The ancient Beast alive againe 3 Most happy in Heaven    They that are inquisitive to know how he gives a particular account of these Periods may if they understand the Latine Tongue or by the helpe of such friends look into Alsted himselfe in the fore-cited place or into Mr. Mede in English Diatrib par 4. p. 453. whither I refer them lest I should bee needlessely tedious to my friends that fear the prolixity of this Treatise Which therefore I prevent all I can § 3 So that by this Account the beginning of the thousand yeers will not be far off about one and forty yeers hence SECT VI. Mr. Medes Accounts § 1 IN his Diatrib Par. 4. Page 87. he gives us this Account Having said Page 83. Though Christianity hath been imbraced in former times where now it is not yet it is now spread in those places where in those times it was not so that all laid together wee may account Christianity at this day as large as ever it was in the Apostles time yet that this is not THAT UNIVERSAL KINGDOME OF CHRIST THAT FLOURISHING and GLORIOUS ESTATE OF THE CHURCH WHICH WE YET EXPECT and HOPE FOR my Reasons are these I say Mr. Mede having said these things in page 83 and in page 84 85 86 having given severall of the said reasons then in the said 87. page afore-quoted he addes My next reason saith he shall be from that we read in the Revelation where the Church by the conquest of Michael set free from the Dragons fury is said to escape into the Wildernesse i.e. into a state though of safety and peace and security yet of hardship misery and scarcity For it seems to be an allusion to the Israelites escaping the Tyranny of Pharaoh by going into the wildernesse In this wildernesse or place of hardship c the Church must remaine saith St. John a time and times and halfe a time or as he elswhere speaketh one thousand two hundred and sixty dayes i.e. A yeer yeers and halfe a yeer and when this time shall bee expired that is as learned Divines thinke when so many yeers shall be ended as those dayes are taking the beginning of our reckoning from Michaels Trophe then saith our Apostle shall the Kingdomes of the world become the Kingdomes of our Lord and of his Christ and he shall reigne for ever and ever Rev. 11.15 whereby it should seem that the Church is yet in the wildernesse and that the promised happinesse of the ample and flourishing glory thereof before the end of